Chrysler | All Vehicles 2013 | Owner`s manual | Chrysler All Vehicles 2013 Owner`s manual

2013
OWNER’S MANUAL
200
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name Chrysler
Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and
equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This
manual may also include a description of features and equipment
that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle.
Please disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol
levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive.
Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use
public transportation.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its
products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them
on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink
and then drive.
Copyright © 2012 Chrysler Group LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
1
4 INTRODUCTION
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techCongratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
nicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
your satisfaction.
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
this Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears stamped on the right front door sill
under the sill moulding and printed on the Automobile
Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on
your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.
Vehicle Identification Number
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Stamped VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Locking the Doors with the Key . . . . . . . . . . . .15 䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .21
䡵 SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ To Unlock The Doors. . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .22
. . . . . . . . .23
. . . . . . . . .25
. . . . . . . . .26
. . . . . . . . .26
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters. . . . . . . .27
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .27
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
䡵 REMOTE START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . .28
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ Auto Window Up With Anti-Pinch
Protection — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
▫ Window Lockout Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
䡵 TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
䡵 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
▫ Trunk Internal Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . .42
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .51
䡵 POWER WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . .52
▫ Power Window Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
▫ Rear Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
▫ Auto Window Down — If Equipped . . . . . . . .38
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . .52
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . .67
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) —
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
▫ Transporting Passengers. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . .97
. . . .97
. . . .98
. . . .98
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .60
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —
Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
▫ Air Bag System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . .63
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should
Make Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle has the
key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers
can be used to order duplicate keys from your authorized
dealer. Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers
and keep them in a safe place.
You can insert the double-sided keys into the locks with
either side up.
Vehicle Key
Ignition Key Removal
Automatic Transaxle
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the ignition switch to
the ACC position, push the key and cylinder inward,
rotate the key to the LOCK position, and remove the key.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
NOTE:
• If you try to remove the key before you place the shift
lever in PARK, the key may become trapped temporarily in the ignition switch lock cylinder. If this occurs,
rotate the key to the right slightly, then remove the key
as described. If a malfunction occurs, the system will
trap the key in the ignition switch lock cylinder to
warn you that this safety feature is inoperable. The
engine can be started and stopped, but the key cannot
be removed until you obtain service.
Ignition Switch Positions
1 — LOCK
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
4 — START
• For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), and
power outlets will remain active for 45 seconds after
the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.
Opening either door will cancel this feature.
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches,
radio, hands–free system (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time
for this feature is programmable. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and remove the Key Fob from the ignition. When leaving
the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
SENTRY KEY®
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition The Sentry Key® Immobilizer System prevents unausounds a signal to remind you to remove the key.
thorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
NOTE:
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
• The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds when the or unlocked.
ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position.
The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded
• With either front door open, and the key in the ignition, electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized
both the power door locks and Remote Keyless Entry vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are pro(RKE) transmitter will not function.
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
Locking the Doors with the Key
seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the
There is only one external door lock cylinder which is
engine.
located in the driver’s door.
NOTE: A key which has not been programmed is also
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the door,
considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the
turn the key rearward. To unlock the door, turn the key
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
forward. For door lock lubrication, see “Maintenance
Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” of this manual.
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
During normal operation, after turning on the ignition
CAUTION!
switch, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compatbulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the ible with some after-market remote starting systems.
electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid problems and loss of security protection.
key to start the engine. Either of these conditions will
All of the keys provided with your vehicle have been
result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.
programmed to the vehicle electronics.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 sec- Replacement Keys
onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
possible by an authorized dealer.
a Sentry Key® has been programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
CAUTION!
Always remove the Sentry Key® from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Customer Key Programming
You can program new keys to the system if you have two
valid Sentry Keys® by performing the following procedure:
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key® Transponder blank(s)
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
The PIN is required for authorized dealer replacement of 2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn
the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position for at
keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an
least three seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds.
authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key ProThen, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position
gramming procedure. This procedure consists of proand remove the first key.
gramming a blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank
key is one which has never been programmed.
3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer
within 15 seconds. After ten seconds, a chime will
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to the
sound. In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will
authorized dealer.
begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position and remove the second key.
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key® into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position
within 60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime
will sound. In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will
stop flashing. To indicate that programming is complete, the indicator light will turn on again for three
seconds and then turn off.
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the systems memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting
your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to your authorized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed.
General Information
The new Sentry Key® is programmed. The Remote
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will also be proand with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
grammed during this procedure.
subject to the following conditions:
Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
do not have a programmed Sentry Key® contact your
• This device must accept any interference that may be
authorized dealer for details.
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
Rearming The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors and trunk
for unauthorized entry and ignition switch for unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security Alarm is
armed, interior switches for door locks and decklid
release are disabled.
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the
horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
rearm itself.
If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security To Arm The System
Alarm will signal for about 18 minutes. For the first
1. Remove the keys from the ignition switch and get out
3 minutes, the horn will sound intermittently, the headof the vehicle.
lights will turn on, the park lamps and/or turn signals
will flash and the Vehicle Security Light in the cluster will 2. Lock the door using either the power door lock switch
(one door must be open) or the LOCK button on the
flash. Then the exterior lights will flash for another
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter (doors can be
15 minutes.
open or closed), and close all doors.
NOTE: The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you
lock the doors with the manual door lock plungers.
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
will flash for 16 seconds. This shows that the Vehicle
Security Alarm is arming. During this period, if a door
is opened, the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN,
or the power door locks are unlocked in any manner,
the Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm.
To Disarm The System
Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter
or insert a valid Sentry Key® into the ignition lock
cylinder and turn the key to the ON/START position.
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on
the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
• During the 16-second arming period, if a door is
Security Alarm.
opened or the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN,
the Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm. • The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
trunk entry. Pressing the trunk button will not disarm
• Once armed, the Vehicle Security Alarm disables the
the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters the
unlock switch on the driver door trim panel and
vehicle through the trunk and opens any door, the
passenger door trim panel, the trunk release button on
alarm will sound.
the instrument panel, and the HomeLink®/Garage
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
Door Opener (if equipped).
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm. If one
NOTE:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of
whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the
vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected. The
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
The courtesy lights will turn on when you press the
unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
The interior lights will fade to off after approximately
30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the
Tamper Alert
ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF
If the alarm was triggered, but the warning signals have position.
timed out, the park and taillights flash three times, and
the horn will chirp three times, when unlocking the
vehicle with a valid RKE transmitter to alert the driver.
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
NOTE:
• The front courtesy overhead console and door cour- • The line of transmission must not be blocked with
metal objects.
tesy lights will remain on if the dimmer control is in
the ⬙Dome ON⬙ position (extreme top position).
• Inserting the key into the ignition switch disables all
buttons on the RKE transmitter.
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) —
IF EQUIPPED
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors, open
the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances
approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need to
be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
Vehicle Key
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice to 1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
unlock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash to
RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but not
acknowledge the unlock signal. The Illuminated Entry
longer than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the
system (if equipped) will also turn on.
UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button.
To Unlock The Doors
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition in the LOCK position and the
key removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If there is no key in the ignition switch, pressing • For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are
following procedure:
inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
system. Opening a door with the system activated will
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but not longer
cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to
than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK
deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm system.
button while still holding the UNLOCK button.
Flash Lights With Lock
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
The feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit- 3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
mitter with the ignition in the LOCK position and the
the current setting, proceed as follows:
key removed.
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle In- 4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
formation Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
NOTE: If there is no key in the ignition switch, pressing
the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in
the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm
system. Opening a door with the system activated will
cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to
deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm system.
To Lock The Doors
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and
the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal.
Sound Horn With Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
turned on or off. To change the current setting, proceed as
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
follows:
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped with EVIC. For details, refer to “Electronic • For vehicles equipped with EVIC, refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understand(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Illuminated Approach — If Equipped
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the Opening a door with the alarm activated will cause the
alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate
following steps:
the Vehicle Security Alarm.
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but not longer than To Unlatch The Trunk
10 seconds. Then, press the PANIC button while still Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two
holding the LOCK button.
times to unlatch the trunk.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
Using The Panic Alarm
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press- To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed. second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to headlights turn on, the park lights will flash, the horn
will pulse on and off, and the Illuminated Entry system
its previous setting.
(if equipped) will turn on.
NOTE: If there is no key in the ignition switch, pressing
the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm. you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second
time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
NOTE: You may need to be close to the vehicle when
using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due
to the Radio Frequency (RF) noises emitted by the system.
2
Programming Additional Transmitters
Refer to Sentry Key® “Customer Key Programming.”
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
contact your authorized dealer for details.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
NOTE: Perchlorate Material — special handling may
Separating RKE Transmitter Halves
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate 2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
1. With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down, use a
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
flat blade screwdriver to pry the two halves of the RKE
with rubbing alcohol.
transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the seal
during removal.
3. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
mobile or CB radios.
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
REMOTE START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
General Information
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately
300 ft (91 m).
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal How To Use Remote Start
distance, check for these two conditions:
All of the following conditions must be met before the
1. Weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected life engine will remote start:
of a battery is five years.
• Shift lever in PARK
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
• Doors closed
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
• Hood closed
• RKE PANIC button not pressed
• Trunk closed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Hazard switch off
• Vehicle theft alarm not active
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage
or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button on
the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds.
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
The vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start premawill flash and the horn will chirp twice (if
turely:
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
NOTE:
• Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted — System Fault
• If an engine fault is present the vehicle will start and
then shut down 10 seconds later.
• For security, power window operation is disabled
when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is cycled • The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
to the ON/RUN position.
15 minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN
position before you can repeat the start sequence for a
third cycle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur: NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
will disable the one-time press of the Remote Start button
• The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500
for two seconds after receiving a valid remote start
request.
• Any engine warning lamps come on
• Low Fuel Light turns on
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
• The hood is opened
Before the end of the 15 minute cycle, press and release
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then insert the key into the ignition switch
and turn the switch to the ON/RUN position.
• The hazard switch is pressed
• The transmission is moved out of PARK
• The brake pedal is pressed
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN
position in order to drive the vehicle.
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
DOOR LOCKS
WARNING!
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door
trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the
inside door handle.
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and remove the Key Fob from the ignition. When leaving
the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the shift lever.
(Continued)
Manual Lock Knob
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A door lock switch is located on the driver and passenger
door panel. Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all
of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Power Door Lock Switch
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
4. The driver door is opened.
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h).
The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by
your authorized dealer. Please see your authorized dealer
for service.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
Auto Unlock On Exit
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit Programming
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be
enabled or disabled as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.
Instrument Panel” for further information.
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the Child-Protection Door Lock System —
following procedure:
Rear Doors
To provide a safer environment for children riding in the
rear seat, the rear doors of your vehicle have a Child2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON/ Protection Door Lock system.
RUN and then back to LOCK four times, ending up in
the LOCK position.
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
3. Press the power door unlock switch to unlock the doors.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Child-Protection Door Locks are located inside the
rear edge of the door. Insert the tip of the ignition key or
similar flat-bladed object into the lock and rotate approximately one-quarter turn to the lock or unlock position
(as indicated by the stamped icons).
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged.
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the lock knob up (UNLOCKED position), roll
down the window, and open the door with the outside
door handle.
Child Lock Control
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
There is a single window control on the front and rear
passenger’s door trim panel, which operates the front
Power Window Switches
and rear passenger door windows. The window controls
The control on the driver’s door has up/down switches will operate when the ignition switch is turned to the
that give you fingertip control of all four power windows. ON/RUN or ACC position, and when the accessory
delay feature is active.
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in the
ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the windows
while operating the power window switches. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
AUTO Power Window Switch
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Auto Window Down — If Equipped
The front window controls on the driver and passenger
door trim panels have an Auto-Down feature. These
switches are labeled AUTO to indicate this capability.
Push the window switch past the first detent, release, and
the window will go down automatically.
For vehicles equipped with EVIC, the power window
switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned off. Opening either door will
cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
To open the window part way, push the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
Auto Window Up With Anti-Pinch Protection —
window to stop.
If Equipped
To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch
either in the up or down direction and release the switch. Lift the window switch fully upward to the second
detent, release, and the window will go up automatically.
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches To cancel the Auto Up movement, operate the switch
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch either in the up or down direction and release the switch.
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either door will
cancel this feature.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release it when you want the window
to stop.
NOTE:
WARNING!
When the window is almost closed, there is no
anti-pinch protection. To avoid personal injury, be
sure to clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects
from the window path before closing.
• If the window runs into any obstacle during autoclosure, anti-pinch protection will reverse the window
direction and then go back down. Remove the obstacle Reset Auto Up
and use the window switch again to close the window. Anytime the vehicle battery goes dead, the Auto Up
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger function will be disabled. To reactivate the Auto Up
the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto- feature, pull the window switch up to close the window
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
first detent and hold to close window manually.
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Window Lockout Switch
Wind Buffeting
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window control on the other doors. To
disable the window controls on the other doors, press the
window LOCK button. To enable the window controls,
press the window control button again.
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
AUTO Power Window Switch
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, the
word “dECK ” will display in place of the odometer
Use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) display indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer
transmitter to open the trunk from display will reappear once the trunk is closed or if the
outside the vehicle. From inside the trip button is depressed.
vehicle the trunk lid can be released by
pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button With the ignition switch in the LOCK position or with the
located on the instrument panel to the key out, the word “dECK” will display until the trunk is
closed.
left of the steering wheel.
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
NOTE: The shift lever must be in PARK for this button to On EVIC-equipped vehicles, the words “Trunk Ajar” will
display.
operate.
To unlatch the trunk lid from outside the vehicle, press
and release the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter
two times.
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
In the event of an individual being locked inside the
trunk, the trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the
glow-in-the-dark handle attached to the trunk latching
mechanism.
Trunk Internal Emergency Release
As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency
Release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism.
Trunk Internal Emergency Release
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
Some of the most important safety features in your • Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
vehicle are the restraint systems:
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
energy during an impact event
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating
positions
• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger
seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located
all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the
on top of the front seats (integrated into the head
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large
restraint) — if equipped
item in a seat.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) Please pay close attention to the information in this
for the driver and passengers seated next to a window section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
possible.
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren (LATCH).
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
rates of inflation based on several factors, including the
severity and type of collision.
WARNING!
Infants in rear facing child restraints should never
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can
cause severe injury or death to infants in that position.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats. Older children who do not use child
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride
properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow chilrisk of harm from a deploying air bag:
dren to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride arm. If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing
buckled up in a rear seat.
child seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Air Bags room to inflate.
4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under (If You Need Assistance”.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
(Continued)
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and/or Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bag (SAB) during deployment could cause
you to be severely injured or killed.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
The belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the belt will lock and
reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or
being thrown out.
WARNING!
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust
the seat.
WARNING!
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, next to your arm. Grasp the latch plate and pull
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
WARNING!
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your
strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull
up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt.
A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in
a collision.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be at the
strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as
low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Positioning The Lap Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed posi- Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the shoulder belt.
webbing to allow the belt to retract fully.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create
a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
In the front seat, the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
or downward to position the belt away from your neck. you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
Push anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
it up or down to the position that serves you best.
Rear Seat Belts
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
The shoulder belt anchorages of the rear three-point belts
are nonadjustable for outboard and center rear passengers on sedans. The center belt is mounted to the rear
shelf panel and exits through a bezel in the panel.
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
Adjustable Anchorage
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) which
are used to secure a child restraint system. For additional
information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using
The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints” section.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
position.
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortDriver
Center
Passenger
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
First Row
N/A
N/A
ALR
Second
ALR
ALR
ALR
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
Row
If Equipped
• N/A — Not Applicable
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked.
The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/
shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
should always be properly restrained in the rear seat.
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if
the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
collision.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on
the occupant’s chest.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air
bag must be replaced immediately.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) —
The seat belts for both front seating positions are If Equipped
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to These head restraints are passive, deployable comporemove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
These devices may improve the performance of the seat identified by any markings, only through visual inspecbelt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occu- in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
pants, including those in child restraints.
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may 1 — Head Restraint Front Half
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact. However (Soft Foam and Trim)
2 — Seatback
if during a front impact, a secondary rear impact occurs,
the AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the
impact.
3 — Head Restraint Back Half
(Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
4 — Head Restraint Guide
Tubes
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
CAUTION!
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
collision.
2
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle”.
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision,
2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and
a comfortable position.
front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active
Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they
have moved forward (as shown in step three of the
resetting procedure).
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.
3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism
1 — Downward Movement
2 — Rearward Movement
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock
into the back decorative plastic half.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®)
BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
AHR In Reset Position
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
NOTE:
• If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
• For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occuchecked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer. pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
(8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
notification.
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when the best way to keep the baby safe.
the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are the force if there is a collision.
secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
Seat Belt Extender
BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
deactivating BeltAlert®.
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized dealer
NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the can provide you with a seat belt extender. This extender
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough.
while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with When it is not required, remove the extender and store it.
BeltAlert®) seat belt remains unfastened.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The 2 — Knee Bolster
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
NOTE: The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
Bags are certified to new Federal regulations.
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation that are based on several factors, including the
severity and type of collision.
vehicle is equipped with SABIC, they are located above
the side windows. The trim covering the side air bags is
labeled SRS AIRBAG.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental SeatThis vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the protection for an occupant during a side impact. The
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon SABs are located in the outboard side of the front seats.
seat position.
NOTE:
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
but they will open during air bag deployment.
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the • After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
Advanced Front Air Bags.
authorized dealer immediately.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air
Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver,
front, and rear passengers sitting next to a window. If the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
Air Bag System Components
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag • Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
system components:
and Seat Track Position Sensors
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
• Air Bag Warning Light
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolster
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) used for more severe collisions.
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel, because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision
severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may
provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant
during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag
label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
bag only.
2
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact protection to front
and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that
provided by the body structure. Each air bag features
inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each
outboard occupant that reduce the potential for sideimpact head injuries. The SABIC air bags deploy downward, covering both windows on the impact side.
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) Location
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim;
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
The system includes side impact sensors that are calibrated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that
require air bag occupant protection.
WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the SABIC is located should remain
free from any obstructions.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side air bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do
not have any accessory items installed which will
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
• Do not allow occupants to extend any part of their
body outside of the window.
SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Occupants, including children who are
up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
seriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially chil- Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
dren, should not lean on or sleep against the door, side
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
windows, or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
Always sit upright as possible with your back against the
seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the appro- The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
priate sized child restraint, infant restraint or booster seat side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
recommended for the size and weight of the child.
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air
Knee Impact Bolsters
bags, Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags, and
The Knee Impact Bolster helps protect the knees of the front seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on
front passenger, and position the front occupant for the the severity and type of impact.
best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bag.
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addiAlong with seat belts and pretensioners (if equipped), tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
Advanced Front Air Bags work with the bolsters to certain frontal collisions depending on several factors,
provide improved protection for the driver and front including the severity and type of collision. Advanced
passenger. Side air bags also work with seat belts to Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of
improve occupant protection.
injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions.
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On
the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
type of collision.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
are possible, based on several factors, including the
collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to
70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
Inflator Units
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are During collisions where the impact is confined to a
designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side air
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will
bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of collision.
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30 millibetween the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate
seconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes to
in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very
blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you
high speed and with such a high force that it could injure are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
you if you are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag
positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This inflates. This especially applies to children. The side
especially applies to children.
curtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when
it is inflated.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time, • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
as the battery has power or until the ignition key is
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
removed.
Front And Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped
• Unlock the doors automatically.
In front and side impacts, impact sensors — if equipped In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
impact events.
changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.
Enhanced Accident Response System
If A Deployment Occurs
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if the
communication network remains intact, and the power
remains intact, depending on the nature of the event the
ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you do have a collision, which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deyou might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. bags will not be in place to protect you.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
WARNING!
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
immediately.
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retractor
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediprocess that generates the non-toxic gas used for air ately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the System serviced as well.
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Bag Warning Light
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free. If any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems pereight-second interval.
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
is designed to record such data as:
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
were buckled/fastened;
crash investigation.
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
These data can help provide a better understanding of such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
vehicle or the EDR.
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK.
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information: http://
www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedrivers-childsafetyChildren 12 years or younger should ride properly index-53.htm
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
WARNING!
the rear seats rather than in the front.
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
There are different sizes and types of restraints for projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
children from newborn size to the child almost large hold even an infant on your lap could become so
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child great that you could not hold the child, no matter
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct how strong you are. The child and others could be
seat for your child.
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and
Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached
the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight limit
of their booster seat
Recommended Type of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in
the rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat
of the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat
of the vehicle
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearwardreach the highest weight or height allowed by their
facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
convertible child seat.
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
WARNING!
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
Infants And Child Restraints
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearwardfacing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearwardfacing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown
air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a rear
seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
WARNING!
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who • Improper installation can lead to failure of an
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
collision. The child could be badly injured or
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
directions exactly when installing an infant or
allowed by the child seat.
child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
All children whose weight or height is above the
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorforward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident,
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
serious personal injury.
Older Children And Child Restraints
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit perivehicle’s seat belt alone:
odically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face
the vehicle seat?
or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle.
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the or behind their back.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Seat Belt Only
LATCH –
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors
Tether Anchor
Only
+ Top Tether
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
2
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating
position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the
child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
belt be used together to attach a rear-facing
or forward-facing child restraint?
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower
anchorages?
No
Yes
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
alone instead of the LATCH anchorage
system once the combined weight is more
than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint.
You can install child restraints with flexible
lower anchors in the center position. Do not
install child restraints with rigid lower
anchors in the center position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Can the head restraints be removed?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install
a child seat in the center position next to a
child seat using the LATCH anchorages in
an outboard position.
The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
2
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
Rear Seat LATCH Anchorages
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position located in
the panel between the rear seatback and the
rear window. These tether strap anchorages are
under a plastic cover with the tether anchorage symbol
on it.
2
Tether Strap Anchorages
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. If you are installing LATCHcompatible child restraints next to each other, you
must use the seat belt for the center position. You can
then use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s
seat belt for installing child seats in the outboard
positions. Please refer to “Installing The LATCHCompatible Child Restraint System” for typical installation instructions.
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attachments in the center seating position. Only install this type Always follow the directions of the child restraint manuof child restraint in the outboard seating positions. Child facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraints with flexible, webbing mounted lower attach- restraint systems will be installed as described here.
ments can be installed in any rear seating position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Autoing position.
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section 5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direcBelt” to check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
tions to attach a tether anchor.
To Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the 6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
in the straps according to the child restraint manufaceasily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
turer’s instructions.
anchorages.
3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for 7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit.
in any direction.
2
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Seat Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both
types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of
the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is
not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing Restraints in this Vehicle
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints.” The cinching latch plate is
designed to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tight
when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a
child restraint’s belt path. Please see the table below and
the following sections for more information about both
types of seat belts.
2
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward facing child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Can the head restraints be removed?
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten
the seat belt against the belt path of the
child restraint?
No
Yes
The Tether Anchor can be used with the
seat belt until the combined weight of
the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs
(29.5 kg). Use the seat belt without the
Tether Anchor once the combined weight is
more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Contact between the front passenger seat
and the child restraint is allowed, if the
child restraint manufacturer also allows
contact.
In positions with cinching latch plates
(CINCH), the buckle stalk may be twisted
up to 3 full turns. Do not twist the buckle
stalk in a seating position with an ALR
retractor.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
Place the child seat in the center of the seating
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
better fit.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webto pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
“click.”
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
Installing A Child Restraint with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
1.
2.
3.
4.
2
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chilposition. For some second row seats, you may need to
dren (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to
recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get
attach a tether anchor.
a better fit.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
in any direction.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
“click.”
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short
buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert
the latch plate into the buckle with the release button
facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
restraint.
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child
restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
2
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for
that seating position (see the charts above), move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly
behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat.
If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
Tether Strap Mounting
1 — Cover
3 — Attaching Strap
A — Tether Strap Hook
B — Tether Anchor
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
Transporting Pets
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
a collision.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detriPets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses mental and should be avoided.
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
2
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed and
the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
2
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while
driving, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, Defroster
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inopercollision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
able.
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt Floor Mat Safety Information
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
The light should come on and remain on for
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
not lit during starting, see your authorized
Air Bag Warning Light
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into
the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving.
Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
(Continued)
2
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Door Latches
Tires
Fluid Leaks
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
▫ Uconnect® Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .108
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .129
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
▫ Adjusting Side View Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
▫ Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . .110
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .111
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .111
䡵 Uconnect® Phone — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
䡵 VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .142
▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . .142
▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
3
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
▫ Headlights And Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .164
▫ Manual Front Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . .153
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .165
▫ Driver Seat Manual Height Adjuster —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
▫ Reclining Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
▫ Lumbar Support — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .155
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
▫ Fold-Flat Passenger Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
▫ Folding Rear Seat Center Armrest . . . . . . . . .161
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .162
▫ Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
▫ High/Low Beam Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . .168
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
▫ Instrument Panel Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
▫ Map/Reading/Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .169
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
▫ Battery Saver Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .170
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED. . . .180
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . . .181
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
▫ Headlights With Wipers Feature
(Available With Automatic Headlights Only) . . .174
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .184
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .175
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .185
▫ Using HomeLink®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
3
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .189 䡵 CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .190
▫ Front Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
▫ Rear Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .190
䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
▫ Glovebox Storage Compartment . . . . . . .
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
䡵 CONSOLE FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
▫ Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
▫ Ski Pass-Through. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .192
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . .195
. . . .196
. . . .196
. . . .196
. . . .198
. . . .198
. . . .198
. . . .198
. . . .200
. . . .202
. . . .202
. . . .202
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical mirror adjustment. Adjust the mirror to center on
the view through the rear window.
3
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while
set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right
of the button does not illuminate.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in reverse.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
To adjust a mirror, turn the control wand toward the left
Power Mirrors
The power mirror control is located on the driver’s door or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the control wand
in the direction you want the mirror to move.
trim panel.
3
Power Mirror Control
Mirror Directions
When you are finished adjusting the mirror, turn the
control to the center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror.
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adjusting Side View Mirrors
WARNING! (Continued)
Outside Mirror — Driver Side
Adjust the outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of
traffic, with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
inside mirror.
Outside Mirror — Passenger Side
side convex mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror
when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in
the passenger side convex mirror. Some vehicles will
not have a convex passenger side mirror.
Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature
side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the
All exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
vehicle.
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions: full forward, full rearward and
WARNING!
normal.
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than
they really are. Relying too much on your passenger
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster if equipped. Some vehicles may
not be equipped with rear window defroster, in this case
the heated mirrors will still function as intended. Refer
to “Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
3
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use
the mirror, lower the sun visor and rotate the mirror
cover upward. The lights will turn on automatically.
Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect® Phone allows you to transfer calls between the
Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle communications system. Uconnect® Phone allows vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone
you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone using for private conversation.
simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ “Work” or The Uconnect® Phone is driven through your Bluetooth®
“Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your mobile phone’s audio is “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect® features
transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the Bluetooth® technology - the global standard that enables
system will automatically mute your radio when using the different electronic devices to connect to each other without
Uconnect® Phone.
wires or a docking station, so Uconnect® Phone works no
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone requires a mobile phone matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your
equipped with the Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile”, purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned
Version 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect® website for on and has been paired to the vehicle’s Uconnect® Phone.
The Uconnect® Phone allows up to seven mobile phones to
supported phones.
be linked to the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile
For Uconnect® customer support, visit
phone can be used with the system at a time. The system is
www.UconnectPhone.com or call 1–877–855–8400,
available in English, Spanish, or French languages.
(U.S. Residents). Canadian Residents call, 1-800-465–2001
(English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French).
Uconnect® Phone — IF EQUIPPED
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
Uconnect® Phone Button
The radio or steering wheel controls (if
equipped) will contain the two control buttons
button and Voice Com(Uconnect® Phone
mand
button) that will enable you to
access the system. When you press the button you will
hear the word Uconnect® followed by a BEEP. The beep
is your signal to give a command.
Voice Command Button
Actual button location may vary with the radio. The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
The Uconnect® Phone can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth® mobile phone. See the
Uconnect® website for supported phones. Refer to your
mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for
details.
The Uconnect® Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect® Phone
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the Uconnect® Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on
certain radios.
3
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect®
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect® Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect® Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound form voice command “Phonebook New Entry”, or you can break the
compound form command into two voice commands:
“Phonebook” and “New Entry”. Please remember, the
Uconnect® Phone works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or another Voice Command Tree
prompt.
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
• For certain operations, compound commands can be Help Command
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
“Pair a Device”, the following compound command
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
can be said: “Pair a Bluetooth® Device”.
the beep. The Uconnect® Phone will play some of the
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the options at any prompt if you ask for help.
compound form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
To activate the Uconnect® Phone, simply press the The following are general phone to Uconnect® Phone
button and follow the audible prompts for directions. pairing instructions:
Uconnect® Phone sessions begin with a press of the
button to begin.
• Press the
button on the radio control head.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
Cancel Command
“Device Pairing”.
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a • When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”
and follow the audible prompts.
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN), which you will later need to
Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To A Mobile Phone
enter into your mobile phone. You can enter any
To begin using your Uconnect® Phone, you must pair
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone.
after the initial pairing process.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference • For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The Uconnect® webgive the Uconnect® Phone a name for your mobile
site may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
3
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile
phones to your Uconnect® Phone. However, at any
given time, only one mobile phone can be in use,
connected to your Uconnect® System. The priority
allows the Uconnect® Phone to know which mobile
phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
Uconnect® Phone will use the priority three mobile
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to
“Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section).
Dial By Saying A Number
• The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
• For example, you can say “234-567-8901”.
• The Uconnect® Phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
of certain radios.
Call By Saying A Name
• Press the
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Call”.
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
you can say “John Doe”, where John Doe is a previ“Dial”.
ously stored name entry in the Uconnect® phonebook
• Press the
button to begin.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a • Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is
name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your
made to the Uconnect® Phone, for example, after you
Uconnect® Phonebook”.
start the vehicle.
• The Uconnect® system will confirm the name and then
dial the corresponding phone number, which may • A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected
appear in the display of certain radios.
to the Uconnect® Phone.
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
• Depending on the maximum number of entries downTransfer From Mobile Phone
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if availUconnect® Phone automatically downloads names (text
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is availnames) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
able for use.
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phone
Book Access Profile may support this feature. See • Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
Uconnect® website for supported phones.
phone is accessible.
• To call a name from the Uconnect® Phonebook or • Either the mobile phone’s phonebook or the mobile
downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call
phone’s SIM card phonebook is downloaded.
by Saying a Name” section.
3
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or • When prompted, enter the number designation
(e.g., “Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or “Other”). This
deleted on the Uconnect® Phone. These can only be
will allow you to store multiple numbers for each
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transphonebook entry, if desired.
ferred and updated to Uconnect® Phone on the next
phone connection.
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
Add Names To Your Uconnect® Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect® Phonebook is After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
button to begin.
• Press the
main menu.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say The Uconnect® Phone will allow you to enter up to
“Phonebook New Entry”.
32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to
• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom- language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
mended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert” only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, Uconnect® Phone automatiinstead of “Bob”.
cally downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
NOTE:
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended to the main menu.
when the vehicle is not in motion.
“Phonebook Edit Entry” can be used to add another
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be phone number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
deleted or edited.
mobile and a home number, but you can add “John
button to begin.
• Press the
Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say Entry” feature.
“Phonebook Edit Entry”.
Delete Uconnect® Phonebook Entry
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
entry that you wish to edit.
when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
button to begin.
• Press the
mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
“Phonebook Delete”.
phonebook entry that you are editing.
Edit Uconnect® Phonebook Entries
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to
delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook entry
that you wish to delete or you can say “List Names” to
hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which
you choose. To select one of the entries from the list,
button while the Uconnect® Phone is
press the
playing the desired entry and say “Delete”.
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect® Phonebook Entries
• Press the
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Erase All”.
• The Uconnect® Phone will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
• After you enter the name, the Uconnect® Phone will
deleted.
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you • Note that only the phonebook in the current language
wish to delete.
is deleted.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current • Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
language is deleted.
deleted or edited.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
List All Names In The Uconnect® Phonebook
• Press the
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect® Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
“Phonebook List Names”.
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
• The Uconnect® Phone will play the names of all the accessed through the Uconnect® Phone. Check with your
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phone- mobile service provider for the features that you have.
book entries, if available.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
button to begin.
but- Currently In Progress
• To call one of the names in the list, press the
ton during the playing of the desired name, and say When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
“Call”.
Uconnect® Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sysNOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete” tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
button to accept the call. To reject the
call. Press the
operations at this point.
button until you hear a single
call, press and hold the
• The Uconnect® Phone will then prompt you as to the beep, indicating that the incoming call was rejected.
number designation you wish to call.
• The selected number will be dialed.
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
to “Conference Call” in this section.
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
button to place the current
mobile phone. Press the
To put a call on hold, press the
button until you hear
call on hold and answer the incoming call.
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To
butNOTE: The Uconnect® Phone compatible phones in the bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call ton until you hear a single beep.
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
Toggling Between Calls
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
button until you hear a single beep, indicatpress the
Progress
ing that the active and hold status of the two calls have
To make a second call while you are currently on a call, switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.
button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
press the
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
Conference Call
Call Termination
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
button until you hear a
hold), press and hold the
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there
is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. If the
active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call on
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
Three-Way Calling
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
To initiate three-way calling, press the
button while and hold the
button until you hear a single beep.
a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as
Redial
described under “Making a Second Call While Current
button to begin.
Call is in Progress”. After the second call has established, • Press the
button until you hear a double • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
press and hold the
beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into
“Redial”.
one conference call.
• The Uconnect® Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your mobile phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
Uconnect® Phone.
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Call Continuation
Uconnect® Phone Features
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Language Selection
Uconnect® Phone after the vehicle ignition has been
To change the language that the Uconnect® Phone is using:
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail• Press the
button to begin.
able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
• After the ignition is switched to OFF, a call can • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
continue on the Uconnect® Phone either until the call
English, Espanol, or Francais.
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the Uconnect® Phone and
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
language selection.
• After the ignition is cycled to OFF, a call can continue
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
on the Uconnect® Phone for a certain duration, after
voice commands will be in that language.
which the call is automatically transferred from the
NOTE: After every Uconnect® Phone language change
Uconnect® Phone to the mobile phone.
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phone• An active call is automatically transferred to the mobook is usable. The paired phone name is not languagebile phone after the ignition is cycled to OFF.
specific and is usable across all languages.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
Emergency Assistance
NOTE:
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is • The emergency number dialed is based on the country
reachable:
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
number for your area.
area.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect® Phone is
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
some systems. To do this, press the
button and say
follows:
“Setup”, followed by “Emergency”.
button to begin.
• Press the
• The Uconnect® Phone does slightly lower your
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
“Emergency” and the Uconnect® Phone will instruct
for the mobile phone directly.
the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number.
This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To use you Uconnect® Phone System in an emergency, your mobile phone must be:
• turned on,
• paired to the Uconnect® System,
• and have network coverage.
Roadside Assistance
If you need roadside assistance:
for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454 for
Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico City
in Mexico). Please refer to the “Roadside Assistance”
coverage details on the DVD in the Warranty Information Booklet and the Roadside Assistance references.
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
button and say
some systems. To do this, press the
“Setup”, followed by “Roadside Assistance”.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated
Systems”. Paging works properly except for pagers of
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
“Roadside Assistance”.
work properly with the Uconnect® Phone.
NOTE:
Voice Mail Calling
• Press the
button to begin.
• The roadside assistance number dialed is based on the To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-2069 with Automated Systems”.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
“Send”, is also to be used for navigating through an
automated customer service center menu structure, and
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to leave a number on a pager.
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can also send stored Uconnect® phonebook entries
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
You can use your Uconnect® Phone to access a voice mail
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
system or an automated service, such as a paging service
call and then press the
button and say, “Send.” The
or automated customer service line. Some services resystem will prompt you to enter the name or number and
quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send.
that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect® Phone.
The Uconnect® Phone will then send the corresponding
When calling a number with your Uconnect® Phone that phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence tones over the phone.
on your mobile phone keypad, you can press the NOTE:
button and say the sequence you wish to enter,
followed by the word “Send”. For example, if required to • You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
network configurations. This is normal.
enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you
button and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send”. • Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
can press the
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
Saying a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by
use of this feature.
Working With Automated Systems
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
Phone And Network Status Indicators
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you
could press the
button and say, “Pair a Phone” to
select that option without having to listen to the rest of
the voice prompt.
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your mobile phone, the Uconnect® Phone will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using Uconnect® Phone. The status is given for network
signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect® Phone keypad and still use the Uconnect® Phone (while dialing
will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
button to begin.
• Press the
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth® mobile
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
one of the following:
audio system. The Uconnect® Phone will work the same
– “Setup Confirmation Prompts On”
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
– “Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect® Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect® Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your Uconnect® Phone paired mobile phone to the
button
Uconnect® Phone or vice versa, press the
and say “Transfer Call”.
When you mute the Uconnect® Phone, you will still be able
to hear the conversation coming from the other party, but Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
the other party will not be able to hear you. In order to Uconnect® Phone And Mobile Phone
mute the Uconnect® Phone:
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected”
• Press the
button.
with one electronic device at a time.
• Following the beep, say “Mute”.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth®
In order to un-mute the Uconnect® Phone:
connection between your mobile phone and the Uconnect®
button.
• Press the
Phone System, follow the instructions described in your
mobile phone User’s Manual.
• Following the beep, say “Mute off”.
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
List Paired Mobile Phone Names
• Press the
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
• When prompted, say “List Phones”.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.
• You can also press the
button at any time while the
list is being played, and then choose the phone that
you wish to select.
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone call.
If the selected phone is not available, the Uconnect®
• The Uconnect® Phone will play the phone names of all
Phone will return to using the highest priority phone
paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the
present in or near (approximately within 30 ft (9 m)) the
lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone
button and say “Sevehicle.
being announced, press the
lect” or “Delete”. Also, see the next two sections for an
Delete Uconnect® Phone Paired Mobile Phones
alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone.
• Press the
button to begin.
Select Another Mobile Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
phone paired with the Uconnect® Phone.
• Press the
button to begin.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
• At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the From outside the Uconnect® Phone mode (e.g., from
prompts.
radio mode):
• You can also press the
button at any time while the • Press and hold the
button for five seconds until
list is being played, and then choose the phone you
the session begins, or,
wish to delete.
button and say the “Voice Training”,
• Press the
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect®
“System Training”, or “Start Voice Training” command.
Phone
You can either press the Uconnect® Phone button to restore
Uconnect® Phone Tutorial
the factory setting or repeat the words and phrases when
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the prompted by the Uconnect® Phone. For best results, the
Voice Training session should be completed when the
button and say “Uconnect® Tutorial.”
vehicle is parked with the engine running, all windows
Voice Training
closed, and the blower fan switched off.
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recogniz- This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
ing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect® system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following procedures:
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reset
• Press the
button.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a Voice Command period.
• Performance is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries,
• low road noise,
and other settings in all language modes. The System will
• smooth road surface,
prompt you before resetting to factory settings.
• fully closed windows,
Voice Command
• dry weather condition.
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least ½ in (1 cm) gap between the overhead • Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish acconsole (if equipped) and the mirror.
cents, the system may not always work for some.
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• When navigating through an automated system such
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send”.
you.
• After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, say
“Setup”, then “Reset”.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is Far End Audio Performance
not in motion is recommended.
• Audio quality is maximized under:
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names
• low-to-medium blower setting,
in the Uconnect® Phonebook.
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect® Phone Local)
name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are
• smooth road surface,
not similar.
• fully closed windows,
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
• dry weather conditions, and
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.
• operation from the driver’s seat.
• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
• Even though international dialing for most number
not the Uconnect® Phone.
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Recent Calls
• Uconnect® Phone will play the new text message for
you.
If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Download”, Uconnect® Phone can list your Outgoing, Incom- After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward”
ing and Missed Calls.
the message using Uconnect® Phone.
Voice Text Reply
Send Messages:
Uconnect® Phone can read or send new messages on You can send messages using Uconnect® Phone. To send
your phone.
a new message:
Read Messages:
• Press the
button.
If you receive a new text message while your phone is • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
connected to Uconnect® Phone, an announcement will
“SMS Send” or “Send Message.”
be made to notify you that you have a new text message.
• You can either say the message you wish to send or say
If you wish to hear the new message:
“List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
button.
• Press the
button while the
To send a message, press the
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say system is listing the message and say “Send.”
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
Uconnect® Phone will prompt you to say the name or 10.
number of the person you wish to send the message to.
11.
List of Preset Messages:
12.
1. Yes
13.
2. No
14.
3. Where are you?
15.
4. I need more direction.
16.
5. L O L
17.
6. Why
18.
7. I love you
19.
8. Call me
20.
9. Call me later
Thanks
See You in 15 minutes
I am on my way
I’ll be late
Are you there yet?
Where are we meeting?
Can this wait?
Bye for now
When can we meet?
Send number to call
Start without me
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF
Bluetooth® Communication Link
Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
the system from announcing the new incoming mes- Uconnect® Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
sages.
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
button.
• Press the
Bluetooth® ON mode.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say Power-Up
“Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON
will then be given a choice to change it.
or ACC position, or after a language change, you must wait
at least fifteen seconds prior to using the system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
3
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
call
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
language
list names
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
other
pair a phone
phone pairing
pairing
phonebook
phone book
previous
record again
redial
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
return to main menu
return or main menu
select phone
select
send
set up
phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect® Tutorial
voice training
work
yes
3
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
of devices, Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device, satellite
radio, disc player, and a memo recorder.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface Sysfollowing conditions:
tem as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised
voice level.
authority to operate the equipment.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
Voice Command System Operation
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws. Your attention should be focused on safely
operating the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a
collision causing serious injury or death.
The Uconnect® Voice Command system allows
button, you
you to control your AM, FM radio, disk player, When you press the Voice Command
USB mass storage class device, iPOD® family will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a
command.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
seconds, the system will present you with a list of options. a normal speaking volume.
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists The system will best recognize your speech if the winoptions, press the Voice Command
button, listen for dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
set to low.
the beep, and say your command.
button while the
Pressing the Voice Command
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system
will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or
change commands. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice Combutton and say “Help” or “Main Menu”.
mand
Commands
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,
The Voice Command system understands two types of
“Help” or “Main Menu”.
commands. Universal commands are available at all
These commands are universal and can be used from any times. Local commands are available if the supported
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon radio mode is active.
the active application.
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Changing the Volume
• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command • “USB” (to switch to USB mode)
button.
• “Bluetooth Streaming” (to switch to Bluetooth®
Streaming mode)
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the • “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command
• “System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for
Radio AM
Voice Command is different than the audio system.
Main Menu
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”.
In this mode, you may say the following commands:
Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the •
main menu.
•
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
•
• “Radio AM” (to switch to the radio AM mode)
•
• “Radio FM” (to switch to radio FM mode)
•
“Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
“Next Station” (to select the next station)
“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Radio FM
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Disc Mode
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
Satellite Radio
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite • “Next Track” (to play the next track)
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
spoken number)
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
USB Mode
Memo Mode
To switch to USB mode, say “USB”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”.
In this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording, you may press the Voice Command
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
button to stop recording. You proceed by saying
one of the following commands:
• “Play” (to play a Artist Name, Playlist Name, Album
Name, Track Name, etc.)
– “Save” (to save the memo)
– “Continue” (to continue recording)
Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) Mode
– “Delete” (to delete the recording)
To switch to Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) mode, say
“Bluetooth Streaming”. In this mode, you may say the • “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) —
following commands:
During the playback you may press the Voice Combutton to stop playing memos. You promand
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
ceed by saying one of the following commands:
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
– “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
– “Next” (to play the next memo)
• “List” (to list an Artist, Playlist, Album, Track, etc.)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
– “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
– “Delete” (to delete a memo)
• “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
In this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Language English”
• “Language French”
Setup
• “Language Spanish”
To switch to system setup, you may say one of the
• “Tutorial”
following:
• “Voice Training”
• “Change to setup”
• “Switch to system setup”
• “Change to setup”
• “Main menu setup” or
• “Switch to setup”
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice
button first and wait for the beep before
Command
speaking the “Barge In” commands.
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Training
SEATS
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog- Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect® vehicle.
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
button, say “System
1. Press the Voice Command
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice
Training.” This will train your own voice to the system
and will improve recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect® Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”
session should be completed when the vehicle is
parked, engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The system will adapt to the
last trained voice only.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
Power Seats — If Equipped
The power seat switches are located on the outboard side
of the seat near the floor. Use the bottom switch to move
the seat up, down, forward, rearward, or to tilt the seat.
The top switch controls the seatback recliner.
Power Seat Switches
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch the switch when the desired position is reached.
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
WARNING! (Continued)
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The
controls for each heater are located on the center of the
instrument panel (above the climate controls).
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected,
the system will automatically switch to LOW-level after
a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation.
At that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes
from two to one, indicating the change. The LOW-level
setting will turn OFF automatically after a maximum of
45 minutes.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rearThe manual seat adjustment bar is at the front of the seat, ward. Release the bar once the seat is in the position
desired. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
near the floor.
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.
Manual Front Seat Adjustment
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Manual Seat Adjusting Bar
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Driver Seat Manual Height Adjuster —
If Equipped
Reclining Seats
A lever style height adjustment feature enhances comfort
for petite as well as tall drivers. A lever with a ratcheting
mechanism, located on the outboard side of the seat,
raises and lowers it. Total travel is 2.2 in (56 mm).
The recline lever is located on the side of the seat. To
recline, lean forward slightly before lifting the lever, then
lean back to the desired position and release the lever.
Lean forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to
its normal position.
Seat Height Adjustment Lever
Recline Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Lumbar Support — If Equipped
This feature allows you to increase or decrease the
amount of lumbar support. The control lever is located
on the outboard side of the driver’s seatback. Turn the
control lever downward to increase and upward to
decrease the desired amount of lumbar support.
Lumbar Support Lever
3
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Head Restraints
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly
adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a
seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while
the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the
head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”
for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your head.
3
Push Button
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things to Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
WARNING! (Continued)
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active
Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as
loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint
during sudden stops. Failure to follow this warning
could cause personal injury if the Active Head
Restraint is deployed.
Fold-Flat Passenger Seatback
The recline handle on the front passenger seat also
releases the seatback to fold forward.
3
Head Restraints — Rear Seats
The rear seat head restraints are fixed and cannot be
adjusted. For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether refer
to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things to Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Recline Lever
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The hard seatback features a work surface and a molded Folding Rear Seat
rim for retaining items stored on the seatback panel.
To provide additional storage area, the rear seatback can
be folded forward. Pull on the loops to fold down either
or both seatbacks.
Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat
Rear Seat Release Loops
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
When returning the rear seatback to the upright position, Folding Rear Seat Center Armrest
be sure the seatback is latched.
The rear seat is equipped with a folding armrest with
cupholders.
WARNING!
The rear cargo area of the vehicle (with the rear
seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position)
should not be used as a play area by children. They
could be seriously injured in a collision. Children
should be seated and using the proper restraint
system.
3
Folding Rear Seat Armrest
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
2. Then lift the secondary latch located under the front
edge of the hood, near the center and raise the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
Hood Safety Latch Location
Hood Release Lever
Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
position. Place the upper end of the prop rod in the hole
on the left underside of the hood.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the center of
the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
3
WARNING!
Prop Rod Location
NOTE: Before closing the hood, make sure to stow the
prop rod in its proper location.
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS
Headlights And Parking Lights
Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the for parking light operation. Turn to the second detent for
parking lights, headlights, headlight beam selection, headlight operation.
passing light, fog lights, instrument panel light dimming
and turn signals. The multifunction lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.
Headlight Switch
Multifunction Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
Turning the end of the multifunction lever to the third
detent (AUTO), will activate the automatic headlight
system.
With the engine running and the multifunction lever in
the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on and turn
off based on the surrounding light levels.
Headlight Time Delay
There is also a feature that delays turning off the vehicle
lights for 30, 60 or 90 seconds after the ignition switch is
turned OFF. To activate the headlight delay, the multifunction lever must be rotated to the off position after the
ignition switch is turned OFF. Only the headlights will
illuminate during this time. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Lights On Reminder
Headlight Switch
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
when the driver’s door is opened.
3
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
defective.
Turn Signals
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you, to
switch the headlights back to low beam.
Turn Signal Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is
released.
NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-topass position for more than 15 seconds, the high beams
will shut off. If this occurs, wait 30 seconds for the next
flash-to-pass operation.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is on the multifunction
Front Fog Light Operation
lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn on the NOTE: The front fog lights will only operate with the
parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull out headlights on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights
the end of the multifunction lever.
will turn off the front fog lights.
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next
detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when
The front turn signal lamps will turn on as Daytime
the parking lights or headlights are on.
Running Lights whenever the ignition is ON, the engine
is running, the headlight switch is off, the parking brake Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last
is released and the shift lever is in any position except detent to turn on the interior lighting.
PARK.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
NOTE: The Daytime Running Lights will flash when a
turn signal is in operation and return to DRL mode when
the turn signal is not operating.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme
bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights
and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a
door is opened.
Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the
brightness of the instrument panel lights when the parking lights or headlights are on.
Dimmer Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
Map/Reading/Interior Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors above
the rearview mirror. Each light can be turned on by
pressing the barrel. Press the barrel a second time to turn
the light off. Both of these lights can swivel so that the
light can be aimed at a specific spot, if desired. The lights
will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time,
so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the
vehicle. They will not turn off automatically. Interior
lighting also comes on when a door is opened or the
dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the second
detent.
3
Map/Reading Lights
There is a second light located midway back in the headliner.
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved
to the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open. To restore interior light operation, either turn the
ignition switch ON or cycle the light switch.
Battery Saver Feature
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the
interior lights were switched on manually or are on
because a door is open.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
Rotate the end of the lever to the LO position for
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
low-speed wiper operation, or to the HI position for
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch high-speed wiper operation.
on the control lever. The lever is located on the
right side of the steering column.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Changing Wiper Speeds
NOTE: The wipers will automatically return to the park
position if you turn the ignition switch OFF while they
are operating. The wipers will resume operation when
you turn the ignition switch to the ON position again.
3
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper system when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause
between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the windshield wiper/washer control lever to the first detent, and
then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay
interval. There are five delay settings, which allow you to
regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle
every second to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
between cycles.
Changing Intermittent Settings
NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed.
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h),
delay times will be doubled.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the windshield wiper/washer
control lever toward you and hold it for as long as
washer spray is desired.
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in
the delay range, the wipers will operate in low-speed for
two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with defroster before and during windshield washer use.
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in Mist Feature
the off position, the wipers will operate for two wipe Push down on the wiper control lever to activate a single
cycles and then turn off.
wipe to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from
a passing vehicle. As long as the lever is held down, the
wipers will continue to operate.
3
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Headlights With Wipers Feature (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the multifunction lever (on the left side of the steering
column) is placed in the AUTO position. In addition, the
headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if
they were turned on by this feature.
The headlights with wipers feature can be turned on or
off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — if equipped. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Mist Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, pull the lever upward until fully
engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
3
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF
4 — CANCEL
2 — RES +
3 — SET -
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pressing the SET button.
3
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without
erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF
button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set
speed memory.
increase until the button is released, then the new set
speed will be established.
Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
To Resume Speed
decrease until the button is released. Release the button
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
will be established.
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
To Vary The Speed Setting
(1.6 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in- the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
Control.
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
To Accelerate For Passing
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
3
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
The HomeLink® buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different HomeLink® channels.The HomeLink® indicator is
located above the center button.
HomeLink® Buttons/Overhead Consoles
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
system.
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink®
HomeLink® Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Secu- indicator flashes.
rity Alarm is active.
3
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
Training The Garage Door Opener
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door 1 — Door Opener
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to 2 — Training Button
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
Firmly press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink®
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
button you want to program and the hand-held trans6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
mitter button.
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indiseconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
cator light. The Homelink® indicator will flash slowly
activates, programming is complete.
and then rapidly after Homelink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re- NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not actilease both buttons after the indicator light changes vate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to
complete the training.
from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is erase the channels.
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
3
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink®
button you want to program and the hand-held transTo reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
mitter button.
follow these steps:
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The Homelink® indicator will flash slowly
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Renot release the button.
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
steps.
and observe the indicator light.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
before 1995.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
erase the channels.
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
time-out in the same manner.
follow these steps:
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until door or gate motor.
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
not release the button.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program
ming A Non-Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
remaining steps.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indiseveral seconds of transmission.
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sigfully trained.
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink®
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
3
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage follow these steps:
door may open and close while you are programming.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
and observe the indicator light.
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programnot release the button.
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
follow all remaining steps.
erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
Using HomeLink®
Troubleshooting Tips
To operate, press and release the programmed HomeLink®
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
any time.
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
• Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.
• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
3
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515
or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for
safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The sunroof controls are mounted between the dome/
reading lights.
Power Sunroof Switch
WARNING!
• Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
3
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatithe sunroof.
cally from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the forward again.
Opening Sunroof — Express
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a Pinch Protect Feature
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
held rearward again.
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obClosing Sunroof — Express
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstrucsecond and the sunroof will close automatically from any tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt
will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect
disabled.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Press and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
the glass panel.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
3
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The instrument panel power outlet, located below the
climate control knobs, has power available only when the
For Vehicles Not Equipped With The Electronic Vehicle
ignition is ON. This power outlet will also operate a
Information Center (EVIC)
conventional cigar lighter unit.
The power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds
after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
Ignition Off Operation
For Vehicles Equipped With The EVIC
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) electrical power outlets
on this vehicle. Both of the power outlets are protected by
Instrument Panel Power Outlet
a fuse.
NOTE: To preserve the heating element, do not hold the
lighter in the heating position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
A second power outlet is located inside the center console. NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR® knob
and element must be used.
CAUTION!
Center Console Power Outlet
The center console power outlet is powered directly from
the battery (power available at all times). Items plugged
into this power outlet may discharge the battery and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp)
power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
3
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — #16 Fuse 15 A Blue Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
2 — #11 Fuse 15 A Blue Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER —
IF EQUIPPED
An optional ash receiver is available from your authorized dealer and will fit in the center console front
cupholder.
The optional ash receiver also comes with a cigar lighter
that can be used with the power outlets. Refer to “Power
Outlets” in “Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle”
for further information.
3
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CUPHOLDERS
Rear Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in the armrest between
Front Seat Cupholders
The cupholders in the center console will accommodate the rear seats. Pull down the armrest to use the cupholders.
either two large size cups or two 20 oz (.5 L) bottles or
cans. The one-peice insert can be easily removed for
cleaning. An optional removable ashtray may be located
in one of the cupholders.
Rear Cupholders
Front Cupholders
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
Rear Seat Bottle Holder
There are built-in bottle holders located in both rear door
trim panels.
Rear Bottle Holder
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burning the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors
to avoid injury.
3
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
STORAGE
CONSOLE FEATURES
Glovebox Storage Compartment
The glovebox storage compartment is located on the right
side of the instrument panel. To open the glovebox, pull
outward on the latch handle located on the front of the
glovebox.
Storage
Glovebox Storage Compartment
The center console is located between the front driver
and passenger seats. The center console armrest slides
forward from design position to provide added user
comfort. The center console can be used for storage and
is also equipped with an electrical power outlet. Refer to
“Power Outlets” in “Understanding The Feature of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
3
Center Console Armrest
Center Console Storage
Two separate storage compartments are also located The top compartment holds small items, such as a pen
underneath the armrest.
and note pad, while the larger bottom compartment will
hold CDs and alike. The bottom compartment also contains a 12 Volt power outlet. The console’s front opening
lid allows for easy access to these compartments.
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
CARGO AREA FEATURES
• A notch in the front of the console base allows for use The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
of a cellular phone while it is plugged into the power versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling
nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When
outlet with the armrest latched down.
the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous,
• The power outlet can also energize the cigar lighter in nearly flat extension of the load floor.
the optional cup holder ash receiver.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
WARNING!
seatback above the seat strap.
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music
WARNING!
players, and other handheld electronic devices should
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
be stowed while driving. Use of these devices while
position. If the seatback in not securely locked into
driving can cause an accident due to distraction, resultposition, the seat will not provide the proper staing in death or injury.
bility for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
WARNING! (Continued)
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
• The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in
personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading
your vehicle:
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put heavier
objects as low and as far forward as possible. Place as
much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle. Too much
weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the
rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
3
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Ski Pass-Through
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
There is a ski pass-through door located behind the rear Rear Window Defroster
seat armrest that allows longer items, such as snow skis, to
The rear window defroster button is located on
be stored in the rear cargo area. Lower the armrest and pull
the climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button
downward on the latch to open the ski pass-through door.
to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button
will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on.
The rear window defroster automatically turns off after
approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes
of operation, press the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
Ski Pass-Through
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
3
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES. . . . . . . . . . .208
▫ EVIC Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
▫ Compass Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .210
▫ Average Fuel Economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
䡵 MINI-TRIP COMPUTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . .223
▫ Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
▫ Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
▫ Tire PSI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . .225
▫ Elapsed Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) Displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
▫ Oil Change Required — If Equipped . . . . . . .228
▫ EVIC Units Selection (UNITS IN Display) . . . .234
▫ System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
▫ Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features) . . . . . . . .234
4
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK . . . . . . . . . . .237
䡵 Uconnect® 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/
HDD/NAV — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE for
CD and MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
▫ Operating Instructions
(Voice Command System) — If Equipped. . . . .238
▫ LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) . . . . . . .259
▫ Operating Instructions
(Uconnect® Phone) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .238
▫ Uconnect® (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped . . .260
▫ INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) . . . . . .259
䡵 Uconnect® 130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 䡵 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. . . . . . .247
▫ Connecting The iPod® Or External
▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE For
USB Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CD And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
▫ Using This Feature. . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Notes on Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
▫ Controlling The iPod® Or External
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . .247
USB Device Using Radio Buttons .
䡵 Uconnect® 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO . . . . .247
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. . . . . . .247
. . . . . . . . .264
. . . . . . . . .265
. . . . . . . . .265
. . . . . . . . .266
. . . . . . . . .266
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268 䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . .273
▫ Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . . . .270 䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning . . . . . .273
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .272
4
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1
2
3
4
5
— Air Outlet
— Side Window Demister Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Ignition Switch
— Analog Clock
6 — Radio
7 — Passenger Airbag
8 — Glove Compartment
9 — Heated Seat Switch – If Equipped
10 — Hazard Switch
11 — Storage Compartment
12 — Climate Control
13 — Trunk Release Button
14 — Power Outlet
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to Floor and
1. Temperature Gauge
the Fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera- as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
ture. Any reading below the red mark of the gauge shows from the engine cooling system.
that the engine cooling system is operating properly. The
2. Fuel Door Reminder
gauge pointer may show a higher than normal temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, in
This is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is
heavy stop and go traffic, or when towing a trailer.
located on the left side of the vehicle.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument
cluster will sound a chime. Pull over and stop the vehicle.
Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the H (red) mark, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
3. Fuel Gauge
When the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position, the
pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank.
There are steps that you can take to slow down an 4. Speedometer
impending overheat condition. If your air conditioning is Indicates the vehicle speed in miles per hour (MPH) and
on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat kilometers per hour (km/h).
to the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
5. Low Fuel Light
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
When the fuel level drops to approximately
2.0 gallons (7.6 Liters), the fuel symbol will light 7. Air Bag Warning Light
and a single chime will sound.
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
NOTE: This light will remain on until a minimum of
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
approximately 3.0 gallons of fuel is added.
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
6. Charging System Light
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
This light shows the status of the electrical charg- dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
ing system. The light should come on briefly in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
when the ignition is first turned on and remain on briefly further information.
as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while 8. Seat Belt Reminder Light
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s electrical devices,
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/
such as the Front Fog Lights or Rear Window Defroster.
RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
If the Charging System Light remains on, it means that
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if
the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See your local the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound.
authorized dealer.
4
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver seat 10. Engine Temperature Warning Light
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Warning Light will
This light warns of an overheated engine condiflash or remain on continuously. Refer to “Occupant
tion. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a
Vehicle” for further information.
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
9. Oil Pressure Warning Light
Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to
pass H, and a continuous chime will occur until the
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
engine is allowed to cool or the 4 minutes duration is
light will come on and remain on when the ignition
expired, whichever come first.
switch is turned from the OFF to the ON/RUN position,
and the light will turn off after the engine is started. If the If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
bulb does not come on during starting, have the system and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off.
Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the
checked by an authorized dealer.
vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
If the light comes on and remains on while driving, stop
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
the vehicle and shut off the engine. DO NOT OPERATE
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS CORRECTED.
Do In Emergencies” for further information.
The light does not show the quantity of oil in the engine.
This can be determined using the procedure shown in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
11. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock brakes (ABS), are also
equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD).
In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light
will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair
to the ABS system is required.
The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi- approximately three seconds. The light should then turn
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
4
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is NOTE: You must apply the brakes before shifting from
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light PARK.
inspected by an authorized dealer.
14. Odometer Display/Trip Odometer Display
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
The odometer display shows the total distance the veapplied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
hicle has been driven.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
12. Tachometer
The silver area of the scale shows the permissible engine
revolutions-per-minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear range.
Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to
prevent engine damage.
13. Shift Lever Indicator
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
automatic transmission.
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
The two trip odometers show individual trip mileage.
To switch from odometer to trip odometers, press and
release the Trip Odometer button. To reset a trip odometer, display the desired trip odometer to be reset then
push and hold the button until the display resets (approximately 2 seconds). Refer to “Trip Odometer Button”
for additional information.
Vehicle Odometer Messages
NOTE: If the instrument cluster is equipped with the
optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),
then warnings such as ”Low Tire,” “Door Ajar” and
“Trunk Ajar” will display in the EVIC. (Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” for specific
messages).
LoW tirE
When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer disWhen the appropriate conditions exist, the odometer will play will toggle between LoW and tirE for three cycles.
display the following messages:
HOTOIL
door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Ajar
When this message is displayed there is a engine oil
dECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trunk Ajar over-temperature condition. When this condition occurs,
LoW tirE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Tire Pressure the “HOTOIL” message will be displayed in the odomCHANgE OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change Required eter along with a chime.
gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Cap Fault Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In
HOTOIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Oil Temperature Emergencies”.
Exceeds Safe Threshold
4
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
change indicator system is duty cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
If the vehicle diagnostic system detects a leak or change
dependent upon your personal driving style.
in the evaporative system, or the fuel filler cap is loose,
improperly installed, or damaged, the words “gASCAP” Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
will display in the odometer display area. If this occurs, time you turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position. To
tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odom- turn off the message temporarily, press and release the Trip
eter reset button to turn off the “gASCAP” message. Odometer button on the instrument cluster. To reset the oil
(Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II” in change indicator system (after performing the scheduled
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information). If maintenance) perform the following procedure:
the problem continues, the message will appear the next
Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do not
time the vehicle is started. See your authorized dealer
start the engine).
service center as soon as possible.
Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly 3 times within
CHANgE OIL
10 seconds.
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “CHANgE OIL” message will flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
gASCAP
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Infor- 17. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Indicator Light
mation Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle InforThis light informs you of a problem with the
mation Center (EVIC)”.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
15. Cruise Indicator — If Equipped
problem is detected, the light will come on
while the engine is running. If the light remains
This indicator shows that the Electronic Speed
lit
with
the
engine running, your vehicle will usually be
Control System is ON.
drivable and not need towing, however see your autho16. Odometer/Trip Odometer Reset Button
rized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light is flashing when the engine is running you
may experience power loss, an elevated/rough idle, and
Press and release this button to change the display from
increased brake pedal effort, and your vehicle may
odometer to “Trip A.” Press and release it a second time
require towing. Immediate service is required.
to change the display to “Trip B.” Press and release it a
The light will come on when the ignition switch is first
third time to change the display back to the odometer.
turned on and remain briefly as a bulb check. This is
To reset the trip odometer, first display the trip mileage
normal. If the light does not come on during starting,
that you want to reset, “Trip A” or “Trip B.” Then push
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
and hold the button (approximately 2 seconds) until the
display resets to 0 miles (km). The odometer must be in
Trip Mode to reset the trip odometer.
Trip Odometer
4
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
18. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.
21. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
22. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
19. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light will flash rapidly for approximately
16 seconds when the alarm system is arming.
The light will begin to flash slowly indicating
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Conthat the system is armed. The light will stop
trol system (ESC) has been turned off by the
flashing
when
the vehicle is disarmed.
driver.
20. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrows will flash in unison with the exterior
turn signal, when using the turn signal lever. A
chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile
(1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
23. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light — If Equipped
This light monitors the ABS. This light will come
on when the ignition key is turned to the ON/
RUN position and may stay on for approximately three seconds.
NOTE: If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check If the ABS light remains on or comes on during driving,
it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
for a defective outside light bulb.
is not functioning and that service is required, however,
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
the conventional brake system will continue to operate Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
normally provided that the BRAKE warning light is malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
not on.
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized
as soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti-Lock
dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed
Brakes.
and corrected.
The ABS warning light should be checked frequently to
NOTE:
assure that it is operating properly. Turn the ignition key
to the on position, but do not start the vehicle. The light The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Activation/
should come on. If the light does not come on, have the Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
system inspected by an authorized dealer.
24. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC
system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/
RUN position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that
caused the ESC activation.
4
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
25. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the 26. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
monitors emissions, engine, and automatic transreplacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
mission control systems. The light will illuminate when
to continue to function properly.
the key is in the ON/RUN position before engine start.
If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from
CAUTION!
LOCK to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the light after
warning have been established for the tire size
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using re- stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
placement equipment that is not of the same size, most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause not require towing.
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
4
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system. It also could affect
fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is flashing,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will
soon occur. Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
27. Transmission Temperature Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light indicates that the transmission fluid
temperature is running hot. This may occur
with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this
light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the
light turns off.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
MINI-TRIP COMPUTER — IF EQUIPPED
The Mini-Trip Computer is located in the instrument
cluster and features a driver-interactive trip information
and temperature display.
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
be driven several minutes before the updated tempera28. High Beam Indicator
ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
This light indicates that the headlights are on high displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings
beam. Pull the turn signal lever toward the steer- are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
ing wheel to switch the headlights to low beam.
29. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display — If Equipped
This display shows the EVIC messages when the appropriate conditions exist. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” for further information.
4
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Buttons
RESET Button
To reset the display shown, turn the ignition switch to the
ON position, then press and hold the RESET button
located on the steering wheel.
The following displays can be reset or changed:
• Trip A
• Trip B
Trip Odometer (ODO)
This display shows the distance traveled since the last
reset. Press and release the STEP button on the instrument cluster to switch from odometer, to Trip A or Trip B.
Trip A
STEP Button
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
Press the STEP button located on the steering wheel to reset.
scroll through sub menus (i.e., Temperature, Trip Func- Trip B
tions: Odometer, Trip A, Trip B).
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
Mini-Trip Control Buttons
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED
The EVIC consists of the following:
• Compass Heading Display (N, S, E, W, NE, NW, SE, SW)
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the • Mileage (Avg/MPG)
instrument cluster.
• Miles To Empty
• Low Tire Information (Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) Displays) — if equipped
• Timer
• Units
• System Warnings (Door Ajar, etc.)
• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
• Outside Temperature Display (°F or °C)
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
• Audio Mode Displays – 12 preset Radio Stations or
CD Title and Track number when playing
4
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The system allows the driver to select information by MENU Button
pressing the following buttons on the instrument panel
Press and release the MENU button to advance
switch bank located below the climate controls:
the display to each of the EVIC Main Menu
features. Upon reaching the last item in the
Main Menu the EVIC will advance to the first
item in the Main Menu with the next MENU button press
and release.
DOWN Button
Press and release the DOWN button to advance
the display through the various Trip Functions
or Personal Settings.
COMPASS Button
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
Press and release the COMPASS button to
display the compass heading, the outside temperature, and Audio Info (when the radio is on)
screen when the current screen is not the
compass, outside temp, audio info screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
SELECT Button
• Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
Press and release the SELECT Button to accept • RKE (Remote Keyless Entry) Battery Low (with a
single chime)
a selection. The SELECT Button also resets
various Trip Functions.
• Personal Settings Not Avail – Vehicle Not In PARK
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
the following messages:
• Personal Settings Not Avail – Vehicle in Motion
• Door Ajar (with vehicle graphic showing which door is
open. A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in
motion).
• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime • Doors Ajar (with vehicle graphic showing which doors
after one mile traveled)
are open. A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in
motion).
• Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
• Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime) • Trunk Open (with vehicle graphic showing and open
trunk and A single chime )
• Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single
• Lights On
chime)
4
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Key In Ignition
• Remote start aborted — Door ajar
• Remote start aborted — Hood ajar
• Remote start aborted — Trunk ajar
• Remote start aborted — Fuel low
• Remote start disabled — System fault
• Oil Change Required (with a single chime)
Oil Change Required — If Equipped
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The Oil Change Required message will
flash in the EVIC display for approximately five seconds
after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
• Low Tire (with a graphic of the car showing which tire(s) time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
is/are low - with a single chime). Refer to ⬙Tire Pressure position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indicaMonitoring System⬙ in ⬙Starting and Operating⬙.
tor system (after performing the scheduled maintenance),
• Check TPM System (with a single chime) Refer to ⬙Tire perform the following procedure:
Pressure Monitoring System⬙ in ⬙Starting and Oper1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not
ating⬙.
start the engine.)
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times
within 10 seconds.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
• Elapsed Time
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you • EVIC Units Selection
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
• System Status
reset. If necessary repeat this procedure.
• Personal Settings
EVIC Main Menu
NOTE: For features in the EVIC that can be reset (AverTo step to each main menu feature press and release the
age Fuel Economy and Elapsed Time), the EVIC prompts
MENU button once for each step. A step from the last item
a reset with a SELECT button graphic and the word
in the list will cause the first item in the feature list to be
RESET next to it.
displayed. The following features are in the Main menu:
When the SELECT button is pressed, the selected feature
• Compass
will reset and RESET ALL will display next to the
• Outside Temperature
SELECT button graphic. Pressing SELECT a second time
will reset both Average Fuel Economy and Elapsed Time.
• Audio Information (if radio is on) display
After three seconds without pressing SELECT, RESET
• Average Fuel Economy
ALL will return to RESET and only the selected feature
will have been reset.
• Distance to Empty
• Tire Pressure Status display
4
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Compass Display
Automatic Compass Calibration
COMPASS Button
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to calibrate the compass manually. When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and the
EVIC will flash the “CAL” indicator until the compass is
calibrated. You may calibrate the compass by completing
one or more 360–degree turns (in an area free from large
metal or metallic objects) until the CAL indicator in the
EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.
The compass heading indicates the direction
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the
compass button to display one of eight compass headings, the outside temperature, and
audio information (if the radio is on) if the EVIC display
is not already displaying this screen.
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and an
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
environment free from large metallic objects such as buildbe driven several minutes before the updated temperaings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks, etc.
ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
Manual Compass Calibration
Compass Variance
If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate, and the
variance has been properly set, you may wish to manually recalibrate the compass. To manually calibrate the
compass:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
Start the engine. Leave the shift lever in PARK in order set, the compass will automatically compensate for
the differences and provide the most accurate compass
to enter the EVIC Programming Menus.
heading.
Press and release the MENU button until “Personal
NOTE: Magnetic and battery powered devices, (such as
Settings” displays in the EVIC.
cell phones, iPod’s, radar detectors, PDA’s and laptops)
Press and release the DOWN button until “Calibrate
should be kept away from the top of the instrument panel.
Compass Yes” displays in the EVIC.
This is where the compass module is located and such
Press and release the SELECT button and the “CAL” devices may interfere and cause false compass readings.
indicator will start flashing.
5. Drive the vehicle slowly (under 5 mph / 8 km/h),
completing one or more circles (in an area free from
large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL” indicator
turns off. The compass will now function normally.
4
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Press and release the DOWN button until “Compass
Variance” and the current Variance Value displays in
the EVIC.
4. Press and release the SELECT button to increment the
Variance Value by one, (one button press per update),
until the proper variance zone is selected according to
the map.
NOTE: The Variance Values will wrap around from 15
back to 1. The Default Variance is Zone 8.
Average Fuel Economy
Compass Variance Map
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
Average Fuel Economy can be reset by pressing and
holding the SELECT button (as prompted in the EVIC
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Leave the
display). Upon reset, the history information will be
shift lever in PARK.
erased, and the averaging will continue from the last fuel
2. Press and release the MENU button until “Personal average reading before the reset.
Settings” displays in the EVIC.
To Change Compass Variance:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Tire PSI
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset.
Press and release the MENU button until ⬙Tire PSI⬙ is
displayed.
Tire pressure information is displayed as follows:
• If tire pressure is OK for all tires, TIRE and a vehicle
graphic are displayed with tire pressure values in each
corner or the graphic.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
• If one or more tires have low pressure, LOW TIRE and
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE display value.
a vehicle graphic are displayed with tire pressure
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
values in each corner of the graphic. Tire pressure
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
values that are too low will be flashing.
to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL”. This display will
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a • If the Tire Pressure System requires service, ⬙Check
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
TPM System⬙ is displayed. Tire PSI is an information
LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display.
only function and cannot be reset.
4
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Elapsed Time
System Status
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset. Displays SYSTEM OK if there are no active Warning
Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is Messages stored. Pressing and releasing the DOWN
in the RUN or START position.
button when SYSTEM OK is displayed will do nothing.
Displays SYSTEM WARNINGS PRESENT if there are
Elapsed time is displayed as follows:
active Warning Messages stored. Pressing and releasing
hours:minutes:seconds
the DOWN button when SYSTEM WARNINGS PRESElapsed time can be reset by pressing and holding the ENT is displayed will display each stored warning for
SELECT button (as prompted in the EVIC display). Upon each button press. Press and Release the MENU button to
reset all digits will change to zeros and time will start return to the Main Menu.
incrementing again if the ignition switch is in RUN or Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
START.
Features)
EVIC Units Selection (UNITS IN Display)
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
Displays the units used for the Outside Temperature, features when the automatic transaxle is in PARK.
Average Fuel Economy, Distance to Empty and Tire Press and release the MENU button until “Personal
Pressure features. Press and Release the SELECT button Settings” displays in the EVIC.
to toggle units between ⬙U.S.⬙ and ⬙METRIC⬙.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
Press and release the DOWN button to display the RKE Unlock
following programmable features:
When “Driver Door 1st Press” is selected, only the
driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote
Language
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When
When in this display you may select different languages
Driver Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions.
transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenPressing the SELECT button while in this display selects
ger’s doors. When “All Doors 1st Press” is selected, all of
English, Spanish, French, German, Italian, or Dutch dethe doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
pending on availability. As you continue, the displayed
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,
information will be shown in the selected language.
press and release the SELECT button until “Driver Door
Auto Unlock on Exit
1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears.
When ON is selected and the transaxle is in the PARK or Sound Horn with Lock
NEUTRAL position, all doors will unlock when the
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
driver’s door is opened. To make your selection, press the
the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature
SELECT button until ON or OFF appears.
may be selected with or without the Flash Lamp with
Lock feature. To make your selection, press and release
the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears.
4
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The headlights
will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
were turned on by this feature. To make your selection,
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE
press the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears.
transmitter. This feature may be selected with or without
the Sound Horn on lock feature selected. To make your NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
selection, press and release the SELECT button until ON or causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
OFF appears.
brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
Headlamp Off Delay
Flash Lamp with Lock
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
the SELECT button until 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds appears.
Headlamps With Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately
Key-Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window switches,
radio, Uconnect® phone (if equipped), and power outlets
will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition
switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either
front vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your
selection, press the SELECT button until Off, 45 sec., 5 min.,
or 10 min. appears.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
Illumin. Approach
SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter. To
make your selection, press the SELECT button until “OFF,”
“30 sec,” “60 sec,” or “90 sec” appears.
To set the analog clock, located at the top center of the
instrument panel, press and hold the button in until the
setting is correct. The clock will adjust slowly at first and
then quicker the longer the button is held.
Display Units In
4
The EVIC and odometer can be changed between English
and Metric units of measure. To make your selection,
press and release the SELECT button until “U.S.” or
“METRIC” appears.
Compass Variance
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
Calibrate Compass
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
Setting The Analog Clock
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect® 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV —
IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect® 130
Refer to your Uconnect® user’s manual for detailed
operating instructions.
Operating Instructions (Voice Command
System) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” for further details.
Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) —
If Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” for further details.
Uconnect® 130
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
TIME Button
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second and radio frequency.
time to turn off the radio.
Clock Setting Procedure
Electronic Volume Control
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
The electronic volume control turns continuously
(360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turn- 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
ing the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases
the volume, and to the left decreases it.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
set at the same volume level as last played.
will begin to blink.
SEEK Buttons
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL conPress and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
trol knob to save time change.
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
4
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
treble tones.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
TUNE Control
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise sound level from the right or left side speakers.
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the front and rear speakers.
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
RW/FF
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
AM/FM Button
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
4
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
NOTE:
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
to operate the radio.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The Uconnect® 130 is a single CD player. Do not
attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can
cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within Press this button to change the display from a large CD
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
RW/FF
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
button works in a similar manner.
4
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
AM/FM Button
Supported Media (Disc Types)
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
change of pace.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ranfiles properly and may be unable to play the file nordomly selected track.
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Play.
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file • Maximum number of files: 255
recording media and formats are limited. When writing
MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names: designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three- not play the file.
character extension)
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threean MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
character extension)
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files). VBR bit rate.
4
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling
Frequency
(kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
24, 22.05, 16
Playback of MP3 Files
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32,
24, 16, 8
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not • Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
supported.
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
Uconnect® 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or iPOD®, and utilize the vehicle’s audio
system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
4
Uconnect® 130
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
Press this button to change the display to time of day. NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
The time of day will display for five seconds (when position to operate the radio.
ignition is OFF).
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
stations without stopping, until you release it.
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Refer to “Voice Command” in “Understanding The FeaThe electronic volume control turns continuously tures If Your Vehicle”.
(360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turn- Voice Command Button Uconnect® Phone —
ing the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases If Equipped
the volume, and to the left decreases it.
Press this button to operate the Uconnect® Phone feature
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be (if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” in “Understanding The Features If Your Vehicle”.
set at the same volume level as last played.
Electronic Volume Control
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With Uconnect
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch Phone” message will display on the radio screen.
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
SEEK Buttons
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
Press this button to operate the Uconnect® Phone feature
will begin to blink.
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” in “Understanding The Features If Your Vehicle”.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL conIf your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
trol knob to save time change.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With Uconnect
Phone” message will display on the radio screen.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
Phone Button Uconnect® Phone — If Equipped
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
and radio frequency.
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
Clock Setting Procedure
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
procedure, starting at Step 2.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
TIME Button
4
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
mid-range tones.
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
RW/FF
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the treble tones.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
AM or FM frequencies.
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
TUNE Control
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS the front and rear speakers.
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
INFO Button
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
No program type or
undefined
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
16-Digit Character
Display
None
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
Program Type
College
Country
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
16-Digit Character
Display
College
Country
Language
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
4
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
16-Digit Character
Display
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
save time change.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency AM/FM Button
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
be stored into pushbutton memory.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC/AUX Button
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
4
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
NOTE:
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
to operate the radio.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The Uconnect® 130 is a single CD player. Do not
attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can
cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
RW/FF
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
works in a similar manner.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
4
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
AM/FM Button
Supported Media (Disc Types)
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
change of pace.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly
files properly and may be unable to play the file norselected track.
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Random
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Play.
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file • Maximum number of files: 255
recording media and formats are limited. When writing
MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names: designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three- not play the file.
character extension)
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threean MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
character extension)
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files). VBR bit rates.
4
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling
Frequency
(kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
24, 22.05, 16
Playback of MP3 Files
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32,
24, 16, 8
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not • Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
supported.
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3
player or iPod® and utilize the vehicle’s audio system to
amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio is
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
time⬙ priority mode.
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or time of day will display for five seconds (when the ignition
more and the radio will display song titles for each file. is OFF).
4
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcastwww.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music, Number (ESN/SID)
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chilPlease have the following information available when
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
calling:
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
limited coverage in Alaska.
Number (ESN/SID).
System Activation
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite ESN/SID Access
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welWith the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posicome kit that contains general information, including
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
Uconnect® (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the Reception Quality
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on following reasons:
the radio to exit this screen.
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
Selecting Uconnect® (Satellite) Mode
structure or under a physical obstacle.
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display.
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
form of short audio mutes.
mode.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
Satellite Antenna
cause intermittent reception.
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects • Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
on or above the antenna.
4
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions - Uconnect® (Satellite) Mode
INFO Button
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display information between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if availACC position to operate the radio.
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
SEEK Buttons
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek to normal display).
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
RW/FF
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
without stopping until you release it.
direction of the arrows.
SCAN Button
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con- Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
button a second time.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
MUSIC TYPE Button
SETUP Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or following items:
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five sec- • Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
onds will allow the program format type to be selected.
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
Sirius subscription.
type.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
4
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2 memory
can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port, located in the center of the
instrument panel below the climate controls.
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
button number will display.
NOTE:
Buttons 1 - 6
• If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
Uconnect® Multimedia radio User’s Manual for
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
iPod® or external USB device support capability.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect® Phone
• Connecting an iPod® or consumer electronic audio
(If Equipped)
device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate,
plays media, but does not use the iPod® /MP3 control
Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” in “Understanding The
feature to control the connected device.
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to
Use the connection cable to connect an iPod® or external the vehicle’s iPod®/USB/MP3 control system (iPod® or
USB device to the vehicle’s USB connector port which is external USB device may take a few minutes to connect),
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
located in the center of the instrument panel below the
pressing radio switches, as described below.
climate controls.
Connecting The iPod® Or External USB Device
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely discharged, it may not communicate with the iPod®/USB/
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod®/USB/
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.
Using This Feature
By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect to
USB port:
USB Connector Port
• The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
etc.) information on the radio display.
4
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The audio device can be controlled using the radio mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod® contents. faceplate may be used to control the iPod® or external
USB device and display data:
• The audio device battery charges when plugged into
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific • Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
previous track.
audio device)
• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device
playing a track, skips to the next track or press the
Using Radio Buttons
VR button and say ⬙Next Track⬙.
To get into the iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode and
• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click,
access a connected audio device, either press the “AUX”
will jump to the previous track in the list or press the
button on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and
VR button and say ⬙Previous Track⬙
say ⬙USB⬙ or ⬙Switch to USB⬙. Once in the iPod®/USB/
• Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
MP3 control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW button
device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.
long enough will jump to the beginning of the current
track.
Play Mode
When switched to iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode, the • Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
iPod® or external USB device automatically starts Play
holding the FF>> button.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
• A single press backward << RW or forward FF>> will • Press the SCAN button to use iPod®/USB/MP3 dejump backward or forward respectively, for five seconds.
vice scan mode, which will play the first 10 seconds of
each track in the current list and then forward to the
• Use the << SEEK and SEEK>> buttons to jump to the
next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the
previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK>> button
desired track, when it is playing the track, press the
during play mode will jump to the next track in the
SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pressing the
list, or press the VR button and say ⬙Next or Previous
<< SEEK and SEEK>> buttons will select the previous
Track⬙.
and next tracks.
• While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
• RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod® or external USB
to the next screen of data for that track. Once all
device, or press the VR button and say ⬙Shuffle ON⬙ or
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press
⬙Shuffle Off⬙. If the RND icon is showing on the radio
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.
display, then the shuffle mode is ON.
• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio
device mode to repeat the current playing track or press
the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙ or ⬙Repeat Off⬙.
4
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
audio device.
• TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio
device or external USB device.
• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise
(backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying the
track detail on the radio display. Once the track to be
played is highlighted on the radio display, press the
TUNE control knob to select and start playing the
track. Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll
through the list faster. During fast scroll, a slight
delay in updating the information on the radio
display may be noticeable.
• During all List modes, the iPod® displays all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the bottom
of the list, just turn the wheel backward (counterclockwise) to get to the track faster.
• In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod® or
external USB device.
• Preset 1 – Playlists
• Preset 2 – Artists
• Preset 3 – Albums
• Preset 4 – Genres
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks
• Preset 6 – Podcasts
• Pressing a PRESET button will display the current
list on the top line and the first item in that list on the
second line.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
• To exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode.
• LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
level menu of the iPod® or external USB device. Turn
the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to be
selected and press the TUNE control knob. This will
display the next sub-menu list item on the audio
device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired
track in that list. Not all iPod® or external USB device
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
• MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
audio device.
CAUTION!
• Leaving the iPod® or external USB device (or any
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in
extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or
damage the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s guidelines.
• Placing items on the iPod® or external USB device,
or connections to the iPod® or external USB device
in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device
and/or to the connectors.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod® or external USB
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in an accident.
4
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA)
Selecting Different Audio Device
Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the 1. Press PHONE button to begin.
Uconnect® phone system.
2. After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup⬙, then ⬙Select Audio Devices⬙.
Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons
To get into the BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on 3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the
Uconnect® phone system to list audio devices.
the radio or press the VR button and say “Bluetooth
Streaming Audio”.
Next Track
Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the
Play Mode
radio and say “Next Track” to jump to the next track
When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can music on your cellular phone.
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
some devices require the music to be initiated on the Previous Track
device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect® Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on
phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the the radio and say “Previous Track” to jump to the
Uconnect® phone system, but just one can be selected previous track music on your cellular phone.
and played.
Browse
Browsing is not available on a BTSA device. Only the
current song that is playing will display info.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED
The right-hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the
center, and controls the volume and mode of the sound
system. Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase
the volume. Pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will
decrease the volume. Pressing the center button changes
the operation of the radio from AM to FM, or to CD
mode, depending on which radio is in the vehicle.
The left-hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the
center. The function of the left-hand switch is different,
depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand rocker switch operation in each mode.
Remote Sound System Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel, at the three and nine
o’clock positions.
4
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio Operation
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
listenable station, and pressing the bottom of the switch precautions:
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
The button located in the center of the left-hand switch
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
will tune to the next preset station that you have prowiping from center to edge.
grammed in the radio preset pushbutton.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratchCD Player
ing the disc.
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once 4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second 5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
after the current track begins to play.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
too high.
The button in the center of the left-hand switch has no
function in this mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
Manual Heating And Air Conditioning
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
4
Manual Temperature Control
The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of
outer rotary dials and inner push knobs.
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blower Control
Rotate this control to regulate the
amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode. The blower
speed increases as you move the control
to the right from the “O” (OFF) position. There are four blower speeds.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off) position.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
Mode Control (Air Direction)
Rotate this control to choose from
several patterns of air distribution.
You can select either a primary mode
Temperature Control
as identified by the symbols on the
control, or a blend of two of these
Rotate this control to regulate the temmodes. The closer the setting is to a
perature of the air inside the passenger
particular symbol, the more air districompartment. Rotating the dial left
into the blue area of the scale indicates bution you receive from that mode.
cooler temperatures, while rotating
right into the red area indicates warmer
temperatures.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
• Panel
• Floor
Air is directed through the outlets in the instruAir is directed through the floor outlets with a
ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct
small amount flowing through the defrost and
airflow.
side window demist outlets.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed • Mix
so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
for maximum airflow to the rear.
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
• Bi-Level
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
while reducing moisture on the windshield.
• Defrost
NOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there
Air is directed through the windshield and side
is a difference in temperature between the upper and
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxilower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but mum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting.
cool conditions.
4
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix, • The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp
weather will cause windows to fog on the inside,
Defrost, or a blend of these modes, even if the Air
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select
Conditioning (A/C) button is not pressed. This dehuthe outside air position for maximum defogging.
midifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve
fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.
• The A/C will engage automatically to prevent fogging
• Recirculation Control
when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode
control is set to panel or Bi-Level.
Pressing the Recirculation Control button will
temporarily put the system in recirculation • Recirculated air is not allowed in Defrost modes. If the
mode. This can be used when outside conditions
Recirculation button is pressed while in Defrost mode,
such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity
the LED indicator will flash several times then go out.
are present. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in
Recirculation will be disabled automatically when
the control button to illuminate.
Defrost mode is selected.
NOTE:
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. • When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
Air Conditioning Control
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
Press this button to engage the Air Con- If Equipped
ditioning. A light will illuminate when
the Air Conditioning system is engaged.
Rotating the dial left into the blue area
of the scale indicates cooler temperatures, while rotating right into the red
area indicates warmer temperatures.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
• MAX A/C
For maximum cooling use the A/C and recirculation
buttons at the same time.
• ECONOMY MODE
Automatic Temperature Control
Automatic Operation
The Automatic Temperature Control system automatiIf economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn cally maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at
OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then, the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger.
move the temperature control to the desired temperature.
4
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
72°F (22°C) is the recommended setting for maximum
1. Turn the Mode Control knob (on the right) and the comfort for the average person; however, this may vary.
Blower Control knob (on the left) to AUTO
NOTE:
NOTE: The AUTO position performs best for front seat • The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime
occupants only.
without affecting automatic operation.
Operation of the system is quite simple.
2. Dial in the temperature you would like the system to
• Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in
maintain by rotating the Temperature Control knob.
AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button
Once the comfort level is selected, the system will
to flash three times and then turn off. This indicates
maintain that level automatically using the heating
that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the
system. Should the desired comfort level require air
air conditioning is not necessary.
conditioning, the system will automatically make the
adjustment.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located
You will experience the greatest effiin front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or
ciency by simply allowing the system
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind
to function automatically. Selecting the
the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front
“O” (OFF) position on the blower confascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser,
trol stops the system completely and
reducing air conditioning performance.
closes the outside air intake.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
• While operating in AUTO, the system will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or ice on the
windshield. The defrost mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features, which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic,
Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic. This means the operator can override
Blower Control
the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower
For full automatic operation or for
range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired.
automatic blower operation, turn the
The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by
knob to the AUTO position. In manual
rotating the Blower Control knob (on the left).
mode there are seven blower speeds
that can be individual selected. In off NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control
position the blower will shut off.
Operation Chart that follows for details.
4
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to • Floor
change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
knob (on the right) to one of the following positions.
small amount flowing through the defrost and
• Panel
side window demist outlets.
Air is directed through the outlets in the instru- • Mix
ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
airflow.
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the
so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort
for maximum airflow to the rear.
while reducing moisture on the windshield.
• Bi-Level
• Defrost
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxiNOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there
mum
blower
and temperature settings for best windis a difference in temperature between the upper and
shield
and
side
window defrosting.
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
cool conditions.
4
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Air Conditioner Control
NOTE:
Press this button to turn on the air • When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
conditioning during manual operation
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
only. When the air conditioning is
• In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may
turned on, cool dehumidified air will
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
flow through the outlets selected with
mode is not allowed in defrost, in order to improve
the Mode control dial. Press this butwindow clearing. Recirculation will be disabled autoton a second time to turn OFF the air
matically if Defrost is selected.
conditioning. An LED in the button illuminates when
manual compressor operation is selected.
• Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows
to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog, press
• Recirculation Control
the Recirculation button to return to outside air. Some
The system will automatically control recircutemp/humidity conditions will cause captured interior
lation. However, pressing the Recirculation
air to condense on windows and hamper visibility. For
Control button will temporarily put the system
this reason, the system will not allow Recirculation to be
in recirculation mode. This can be used when
selected while in defrost. Attempting to use the recircuoutside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
lation while in Defrost will cause the LED in the control
humidity are present. Activating recirculation will cause
button to blink and then turn off.
the LED in the control button to illuminate.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
• Most of the time, when in Automatic Operation, you
can temporarily put the system into Recirculation
Mode by pressing the Recirculation button. However,
under certain conditions, while in Automatic Mode,
the system is blowing air out the defrost vents. When
these conditions are present, and the Recirculation
button is pressed, the indicator will flash and then turn
off. This tells you that you are unable to go into
Recirculation Mode at this time. If you would like the
system to go into Recirculation Mode, you must first
move the Mode knob to Panel, Mix and then press the
Recirculation button. This feature reduces the possibility of window fogging.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene
glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months is
not recommended because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
Operating Tips
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condiNOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh
suggested control settings for various weather condi- air and high blower settings. This will ensure adequate
tions.
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
4
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Window Fogging
Outside Air Intake
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The Mix
mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and
provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes a problem, increase blower speed. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid
weather.
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for
The A/C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from enterlong periods as fogging may occur.
ing the cabin. The filter acts on air coming from outside the
Side Window Demisters
vehicle and recirculated air within the passenger compartA side window demister outlet is located at each end of ment. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining
the instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct Your Vehicle” for A/C Air Filter service information or see
air toward the side windows when the system is in the your authorized dealer for service. Refer to “Maintenance
FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at Schedules” for filter service intervals.
the area of the windows through which you view the
outside mirrors.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292 䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .298
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
▫ Four-Speed Automatic Transmission —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission (62TE) —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .296
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
5
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 AUTOSTICK® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .325
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .325
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .316
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .325
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .327
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . .330
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
䡵 ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) . . . . . . . . .322
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .335
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .336
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .337
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . .341
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
▫ All Season Tires – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .344 䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .351
▫ Summer Or Three Season Tires –
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .352
▫ Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped
Tire And Wheel – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .346
▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped . . . . . . . . .346
▫ Full Size Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .347
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . . .353
▫ Premium System – If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . .358
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
5
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .364
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
▫ Loose Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . .369
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . .373
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . .373
▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . .386
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . .378
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . .386
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
▫ Recreational Towing – All Models . . . . . . . . . .386
5
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING! (Continued)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
WARNING!
Automatic Transmission
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
For vehicles equipped with Tip Start (Six-Speed Transmission), turn the ignition switch to the START position
and release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter
motor will continue to run, and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running. If the engine fails
to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
Normal Starting
position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm Starting” procedure.
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
accelerator pedal.
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
For vehicles not equipped with Tip Start (Four-Speed
an externally powered electric engine block heater (availTransmission), turn the ignition switch to the START
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
position and release it when the engine starts. If the
5
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Without Tip Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the
engine. This should clear any excess fuel in case the
engine is flooded.
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
15 seconds before trying again.
occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
If the engine is flooded, it may start to run, but not have switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
enough power to continue running when the key is re- repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
leased. If this occurs, continue cranking up to 15 seconds
with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15-second To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 seconds
periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to before trying again.
the floor, repeat the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold
Weather” procedures.
After Starting
With Tip Start
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the decrease as the engine warms up.
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures,
5
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warning effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is bundled under the hood
between the headlight assembly and the Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuse Box) on the driver’s side of
the vehicle.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing on the brake pedal.
NOTE: You MUST press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing on the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, turn
the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key. Once
the key is removed, the shift lever is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the ignition key and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the
ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interpedal must be pressed.
lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/ Four-Speed Automatic Transmission —
OFF position. The key can only be removed from the If Equipped
ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position,
The shift lever position display (located in the instrument
and once removed, the shift lever is locked in PARK.
cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You must
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK
key in the ignition switch to warn you that this safety (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and this section). To drive, move the shift lever from PARK or
stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
service.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
Key Ignition Park Interlock
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
hundred miles (kilometers).
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. lever in PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
moving the shift lever between these gears.
placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
Gear Ranges
move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precauDO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
WARNING!
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
PARK
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle moveThis range supplements the parking brake by locking the
ment and possible injury or damage.
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
(Continued)
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
5
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and remove the ignition key. Once the key is
removed, the shift lever is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the ignition
key from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Never
leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever
could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
• Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
5
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
NEUTRAL
CAUTION! (Continued)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
DRIVE
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
CAUTION!
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), select the ⬙3⬙ range. Under
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
these conditions, using the ⬙3⬙ range will improve perfor- DRIVE 3
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces- This range eliminates shifts into fourth gear. The transsive shifting and heat buildup.
mission will operate normally in first and second gear.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating Shifts into third may be delayed to provide second gear
limits, the powertrain controller will modify the DRIVE operation at higher speeds. Using the ⬙3⬙ range while
and “3” range shift points. This is done to prevent trans- operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions
will improve performance and extend transmission life
mission damage due to overheating.
by reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up. The ⬙3⬙
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be
range should also be used when descending steep grades
modified depending on engine and transmission temperato avoid brake system distress.
ture as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm
up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maxi- LOW
mum efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter Use this range for engine braking when descending very
clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm steep grades. In this range, the transmission will down(refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in shift for maximum engine braking, and upshifts will
this section). During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F occur only to prevent engine overspeed.
[-27°C] or below), operation may briefly be limited to
second gear only. Normal operation will resume once the
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
5
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
Transmission Limp Home Mode
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission recur.
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
following steps:
service is required.
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
Overdrive Operation
Torque Converter Clutch
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (fourth gear). The transmission will
automatically shift into Overdrive if the following conditions are present:
•
•
•
•
•
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
the transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem- some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
perature,
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until
the engine coolant has reached an adequate temper- the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm
ature,
[usually after 1 to 3 miles (2 to 5 km) of driving]. Because
the engine speed is higher when the torque converter
vehicle speed is sufficiently high, and
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission
is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal.
the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
Shifting between the DRIVE and 3 ranges, when the
transmission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that
the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive.
5
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
The shift lever position display (located in the instrument
moving the shift lever between these gears.
cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You must
press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEU(refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in TRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick® shift positions. Manual
this section). To drive, move the shift lever from PARK or shifts can be made using the AutoStick® shift control
(refer to “AutoStick®” in “Starting And Operating” for
NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
further information). Moving the shift lever to the left or
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
right (-/+) while in the AutoStick® position (below the
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
Drive position) will manually select the transmission
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
cluster as 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission (62TE) —
If Equipped
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK
Shift Lever
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
lever in PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.
5
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and remove the ignition key. Once the key is
removed, the shift lever is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
(Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING!
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the ignition key from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever
could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
5
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following indicators should be used to ensure that NEUTRAL
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position: Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever periods with the engine running. The engine may be
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
fully seated.
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
• Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
DRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second,
third, and fourth gears, direct fifth gear and overdrive
sixth gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, or traveling into strong head
winds), use the AutoStick® shift control (refer to
“AutoStick®” in this section) to select a lower gear.
Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be
modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm
up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum
efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter clutch is
inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the
“Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in this section).
During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), operation may briefly be limited to third gear only.
Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
5
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
Transmission Limp Home Mode
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission recur.
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
following steps:
service is required.
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
Overdrive Operation
Torque Converter Clutch
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (sixth gear). The transmission will
automatically shift into Overdrive if the following conditions are present:
•
•
•
•
•
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
the transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem- some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
perature,
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until
the engine coolant has reached an adequate temper- the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm
ature,
[usually after 1 to 3 miles (2 to 5 km) of driving]. Because
the engine speed is higher when the torque converter
vehicle speed is sufficiently high, and
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission
is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal.
the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
Using the AutoStick® shift control, when the transmission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the
transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive.
5
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOSTICK®
In AutoStick® mode, the transmission will shift up or
down when the driver moves the shift lever to the right
(+) or left (-), unless an engine lugging or overspeed
condition would result. It will remain in the selected gear
until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as
described below.
AutoStick® is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick® allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This
system can also provide you with more control during • The transmission will automatically downshift to first
passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
driving, and many other situations.
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
Operation
When the shift lever is in the AutoStick® position (below • You can start out, from a stop, in any gear except top
gear. Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in
the DRIVE position), it can be moved from side to side.
second gear. Starting out in second gear is helpful in
This allows the driver to manually select the transmission
snowy or icy conditions.
gear being used. Moving the shift lever to the left (-)
triggers a downshift and to the right (+) an upshift. The • The transmission will automatically upshift when neccurrent gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
essary to prevent engine over-speed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to To disengage AutoStick® mode, return the shift lever to the
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick®
position at any time without taking your foot off the
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick® is engaged.
accelerator pedal.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick® is engaged.
WARNING!
• If the system detects powertrain overheating, the
transmission will revert to automatic shift mode and
remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.
• If the system detects a problem, it will disable
AutoStick® mode and the transmission will return to
automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
5
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Traction
Acceleration
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the front (driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Shallow Standing Water
Driving through water more than a few inches/centi- Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
meters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and prevent damage to your vehicle.
and Warning before doing so.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
5
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h)
when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause
it to lock up and stall out, and leave you stranded.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you.
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
NOTE:
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
5
CAUTION!
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
The parking brake lever is located in the center console.
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
transmission in PARK.
completely.
PARKING BRAKE
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument
cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
Parking Brake
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift
lever.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
(Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING!
5
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
computer to modulate the hydraulic pressure to prevent
wheel lock-up and avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
WARNING!
• Pumping of the anti-lock brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
WARNING! (Continued)
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
The “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System. The light will
come on when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake
Warning Light” is not on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake
Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, have the bulb
repaired as soon as possible.
If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “Anti-Lock
Brake Warning Light” remain on, the Anti-Lock Brake
(ABS) and Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
Systems are not functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS
system is required. See your authorized dealer.
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related
motor noises. These noises are the system performing its
self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working
properly. This self check occurs each time the vehicle is
started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
5
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into anti-lock:
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop),
• the clicking sound of solenoid valves,
WARNING!
The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated
electronic equipment that may be susceptible to
interference caused by improperly installed or high
output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking
capability. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type, and tires must be properly inflated to produce
• and a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the accurate signals for the computer.
end of the stop.
• brake pedal pulsations,
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional advanced electronic brake control system that includes
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System
(TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS), and Electronic Stability
Control (ESC). All systems work together to enhance
vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions
and are commonly referred to as ESC.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
WARNING!
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very
slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of
an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
5
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not reduce
a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired.
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
WARNING!
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in • The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the “Partial Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability
braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the
Control (ESC)” in this section of this manual.
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
Brake Assist System (BAS)
traction afforded.
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking • The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then • The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the Antimanner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
the safety of others.
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying
the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over/under steer condition. Engine power
may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path. ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual
path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the oversteer or understeer condition
• Over-steer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Under-steer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
5
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
function normally, with the exception of engine power
reduction. This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle
All ESC equipped vehicles can choose the following ESC
is in deep snow, sand, or gravel conditions and more
operating modes:
wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to
ESC On
gain traction.
ESC Operating Modes
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for almost all driving situations. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off” for
specific reasons as noted below.
Partial ESC Mode
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
Off” switch (located in the lower switch bank below the
heater/air conditioning controls). When in “Partial Off”
mode, the TCS portion of ESC, except for the limited slip
feature described in the TCS section, has been disabled
and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
will be illuminated. All other stability features of ESC
ESC Off Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the “ESC Off” NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
switch. This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
operation.
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the “ESC Off” switch. Once the situation requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial Off”
WARNING!
mode is overcome, turn ESC on again by momentarily
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done while
ESC (except for the limited slip feature described in the vehicle is in motion.
the TCS section) has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered
by the ECS system is reduced.
5
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
NOTE:
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” Tire Markings
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
5
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Temporary spare tires are spares designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designaExample: T145/80D18 103M.
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
NOTE:
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
— ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
5
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its
load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified
operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load— Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure— Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the side of the tire.
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire
Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind
the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation pressure is
measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
5
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the weight referenced here.
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuinflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pasGAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
Loading
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE:
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
• The following table shows examples on how to calcu“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
= 650 lbs [295 kg]).
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
• For the following example, the combined weight of
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
(392 kg).
capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
5
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Economy
Tire Inflation Pressures
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear
patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier
tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
The tire pressure should be checked and adjusted as well
as inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at
least once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge
to check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not outside temperature condition.
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla- build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
5
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
Radial Ply Tires
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
WARNING!
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle The instability could cause a collision. Always use
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire with other types of tires.
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
WARNING!
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
All Season Tires – If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
handling of your vehicle.
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires – If Equipped
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
on ice. Summer tires will not contain the all season
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
sidewall. Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
tire inflation pressures.
your vehicle.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
Snow Tires
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states produring the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
5
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel – If Equipped
CAUTION!
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option
Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
tire rotation pattern.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equipcompact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
ment tire and wheel as a spare, a non-matching tempothe Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
vehicle. Temporary use spares are engineered to be used
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
only with your vehicle. Your vehicle may be equipped
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
with one of the following types of non-matching tempo80D18 103M.
rary use spares; compact, full size, or limited-use. Do not
install more than one non-matching temporary use spare T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
tire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip- Full Size Spare – If Equipped
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
WARNING!
first opportunity.
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
5
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening. Replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
replaced.
Life Of Tire
Tread Wear Indicators
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and summer tires, typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule is highly recommended.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
5
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the
Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety
Information section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
Replacement Tires
those of the original wheels.
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
It is recommended you contact your original equipment
or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may
result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Due to limited clearance, tire chains or traction devices
are not recommended.
CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are used.
5
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
reversed.
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
Tire Rotation
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom- warning limit for any reason, including low temperature
effects and natural pressure loss through the tire.
mended cold placard pressure.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in
“Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not
turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure
warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off. The system will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once the system
receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need
to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
5
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately
27 psi (186 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will still be ON. In this situation, the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF only
after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended
cold placard pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants
or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
failure or condition.
to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitor• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
ing Telltale Light.”
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
NOTE:
5
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
Base System
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
illuminate in the instrument cluster, a ⬙LOW
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
TIRE⬙ message will be displayed for a minimum
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure of five seconds and a chime will sound when tire
readings to the Receiver Module.
pressure is low in one or more of the four active road
tires. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be displayed.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible,
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle,
and to maintain the proper pressure.
and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold
The TPMS consists of the following components:
placard pressure value as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙
message. Once the system receives the updated tire
• Receiver Module
pressures, the system will automatically update and the
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” and ⬙LOW
TIRE⬙ message will turn off. The vehicle may need to be
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
Check TPMS Warning
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid when
a system fault is detected. The system fault will also
sound a chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence
will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off
when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault
can occur due to any of the following:
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE:
1. The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a
tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS
will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
ing limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the
sound and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
TPM sensors.
Light” will turn ON and a ⬙LOW TIRE⬙ message will
be displayed for a minimum of five seconds. An
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be displayed.
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
5
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid.
Premium System – If Equipped
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically and the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF, as
long no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
sound and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale readings to the Receiver Module.
Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
remain on solid.
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Three Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four
wheel-wells)
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages, placard pressure value. Once the system receives the
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
update, the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flashCenter (EVIC)
ing, and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
TPMS to receive this information.
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime Check TPMS Warning
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or
When a system fault is detected, a chime will sound and
more of the four active road tires. In addition, the
the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with
addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSthe low tire pressure values flashing.
TEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and then
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to
and inflate all tires with low pressure (those flashing in indicate which sensor is not being received.
the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold
5
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will no longer flash, and the ⬙CHECK TPM
SYSTEM⬙ message will no longer display, and a pressure
value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault
can occur due to any of the following:
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
The EVIC will also display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is
detected. In this case, the ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is then followed with a graphic display with pres1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
sure values still shown. This indicates that the pressure
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the
values are still being received from the TPM sensors but
TPM sensors.
they may not be located in the correct vehicle position.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting The system still needs to be serviced as long as the
that affects radio wave signals.
⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is displayed.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
NOTE:
1. The compact spare tire (if so equipped) does not have
a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS
will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid, and the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM
SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
ing limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, the “Tire
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain ON, a
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
chime will sound, and the EVIC will still display a
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn
flashing pressure value in the graphic display.
OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new
pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long no tire
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need
Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a
information.
minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
in place of the pressure value.
5
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel
economy and performance when using
high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoline
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
having an octane rating of 87. The use of
• This device must accept any interference received, premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not
including interference that may cause undesired provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.
operation.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
following licenses:
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
United States
KR5S18002015B
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experiCanada
267T-S180015B
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates
may be used in your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and driveability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro- Problems that result from using gasoline containing
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
fuel system components.
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
not be covered under warranty.
5
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
• disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
engine controller memory
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
exposure to E-85 fuel.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 MMT In Gasoline
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
• operate in a lean mode
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
• poor engine performance
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
• poor cold start and cold drivability
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
E-85 perform the following:
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
and California reformulated gasoline.
• change the engine oil and oil filter
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
Materials Added To Fuel
CAUTION! (Continued)
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
(Continued)
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
5
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) —
IF EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline-only powered vehicles.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E-85.
5
E-85 Fuel Cap
E-85 Badge
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternating
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and between E-85 and unleaded gasoline is recommended.
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
15% unleaded gasoline.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
• you do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when
refueling
• you drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
least 5 miles (8 km)
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability
during warm up.
NOTE:
Fuel Requirements
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85
fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels.
• Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, you may experience
hard starting and rough idle following start up even if
the above recommendations are followed, especially
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline additive, such as MOPAR® Injector Cleanup or Techron may
be used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in MOPAR® engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
contains additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR® or an
equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is
beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
5
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
Replacement Parts
ADDING FUEL
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts.
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door, on the left rear
quarter panel of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or
damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect driveability.
Fuel Filler Door
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
After removing the gas cap, place the gas cap tether cable
over a hook on the inside of the fuel door. This keeps the
gas cap suspended away from and protects the vehicle’s
surface.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap).
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
Tether Cable
NOTE: If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the
replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
(Continued)
5
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
Loose Filler Cap Message
If the vehicles diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap in loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will be displayed in the instrument
cluster. Tighten the gas cap until a “clicking” sound is
heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly
tightened. Press the trip odometer reset button to turn off
the message. If the problem persists, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might
indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice
NOTE:
in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving the
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
problem will turn the MIL off.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on
if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure that the
gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and doing so may cause the MIL to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
VEHICLE LOADING
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total load
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.
the drivers side “B” Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The label contains the following information:
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
• Name of manufacturer
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
• Month and year of manufacture
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Vehicle Certification Label
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Type of Vehicle
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
5
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
Overloading
Loading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
front and rear GAWR.
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
it is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
TRAILER TOWING
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and In this section you will find safety tips and information
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
GVWR.
and safely as possible.
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve- The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
hicles used for trailer towing.
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
Common Towing Definitions
ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
you in understanding the following information:
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
supported by the scale.
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
allowance for the presence of a driver.
5
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Tongue Weight (TW)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be
more than 10% of the trailer load. You must consider this
as part of the load on your vehicle.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and mediumsized trailers.
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
Trailer Hitch Classification
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Class I - Light Duty
Max. Trailer Hitch
Industry Standards
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch
Industry Standards
Class IV - Extra
Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed
on your vehicle.
5
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission
2.4L/Auto
3.6L/Auto
Max. Frontal Area
Max. Gross Trailer Wt.
(GTW)
1,000 lbs (450 kg)
11 sq.ft. (1.0 sq.m)
(See Note 2)
22 sq.ft. (2.0 sq.m)
1,000 lbs (450 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Note 1: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo,
and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the
Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire
Safety Information” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
Max. Trailer Tongue Wt.
(See Note 1)
100 lbs (45 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
Note 2: Enclosed trailers or open utility trailers with
front shields/guards are not recommended for use with
all four-cylinder engines with automatic transmission.
Please see your authorized dealer for additional information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer collisions.
5
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
WARNING!
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
(Continued)
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and it will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ
the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
(Continued)
1. Max loading as defined on the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard.
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
5
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements – Tires
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact • Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
spare tire.
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
personal injury.
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Oper- • An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation presa hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
sures before trailer usage.
brake controller is not required.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General • Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights And Wiring
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
(Continued)
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
5
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
If you REGULARLY TOW a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation, then change the automatic
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
transmission fluid and filter as specified for “police, taxi,
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
fleet, or frequent trailer towing.” Refer to the “Mainteheavy traffic.
nance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
Automatic Transmission
NOTE: Check the transmission fluid level (four-speed
Towing Tips
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, select
the ⬙3⬙ range (with four-speed transmission) or select a
lower gear using the AutoStick® shift control (with
six-speed transmission).
transmission only) before towing. The six-speed transmission does not require a fluid level check before
towing. If, however, you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, see your authorized dealer immediately for assistance.
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle AutoStick® – If Equipped
under heavy loading conditions, will improve perfor- – When using the AutoStick® shift control, select the
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exceshighest gear that allows for adequate performance and
sive shifting and heat build-up. This action will also
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “4” if
provide better engine braking.
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “3” or
“2” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
– Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to
prevent excess heat generation. A reduction in vehicle
speed may be required to avoid extended driving at
high RPM. Return to a higher gear or vehicle speed
when grade and road conditions allow.
Cooling System
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
City Driving
Highway Driving
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until Reduce speed.
you can get back to cruising speed.
Air Conditioning
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
Turn off temporarily.
maximize fuel efficiency.
5
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF the Ground
All Models
Flat Tow
NONE
NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
Front
OK
Rear
NOT ALLOWED
ALL
OK
On Trailer
Recreational Towing – All Models
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels 3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place the transmisare OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a
sion in PARK.
tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
this procedure:
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
5. Release the parking brake.
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .390
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .390 䡵 JUMP-STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
▫ Engine Oil Overheating
(2.4L Engine Only) — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . .391
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .392
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .410
▫ Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
6
390 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
instrument panel, below the radio.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning • On the highways — Slow down.
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- • In city traffic — While stopped, put transaxle in
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
CAUTION!
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle,
when safe. Turn the air conditioner off and wait until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. After
appropriate action has been taken, if the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately,
and call for service.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 391
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator.
If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Engine Oil Overheating (2.4L Engine Only) —
If Equipped
During sustained high-speed driving or trailer tow up
long grades on a hot day, the engine oil temperature may
become too hot. If this happens, the “HOTOIL” message
flashes in the odometer and the vehicle speed will be
reduced to 53 mph (85 km/h) until the engine oil
temperature is reduced.
NOTE: The vehicle speed is reduced to a maximum of
53 mph (85 km/h). You may of course, reduce your
vehicle speed further if needed.
6
392 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
(Continued)
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The jack and jack-handle are stowed under the load floor
in the trunk.
Spare Tire Stowage
The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor
in the trunk.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 393
Spare Tire Removal
Preparations For Jacking
Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down.
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
3. Set the parking brake.
Spare Tire And Jack Storage
4. Place the shift lever into PARK (automatic transmission) or REVERSE (manual transmission).
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6
394 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire, block the left
rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
while the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 395
WARNING! (Continued)
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
NOTE: Refer to the Compact Spare Tire section of Tires-General Information--for information about the spare
tire, its use, and operation.
1. Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the
spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to the
left to loosen the lug wrench, and remove the wrench
from the jack assembly.
Jack Warning Label
NOTE: The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack
with two attachment points. When the jack is partially
expanded, the tension between the two attachment
points holds the jack handle in place.
6
396 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in Step 3.
Removing Jack Handle From Jack
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning
them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
Jacking Locations
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 397
3. There is a front and rear jacking location on each side
of the vehicle. The plastic trim has been cut away to
expose the jacking locations on the body.
6
Rear Jacking Location
Front Jacking Location
398 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be
placed under the jacking location. Once the jack is
positioned, turn the jack screw to the right until the
jack head is properly engaged to the jacking location
on the wheel to be changed. Do not raise the vehicle
until you are sure the jack is securely engaged.
Jack Engaged (Rear Jacking Location)
WARNING!
Jack Engaged (Front Jacking Location)
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 399
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until
the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
6. Remove the wheel nuts, and pull the wheel and wheel
covers (where applicable) off the hub. Install the spare
wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the
nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
6
Mounting Spare Tire
400 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
• To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning
may result in personal injury.
• To avoid possible personal injury, handle the
wheel covers with care to avoid contact with any
sharp edges.
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
9. Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is
free. Release the emergency brake before driving the
vehicle. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the
assembly using the means provided.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
8. Finish tightening the nuts. Push down on the wrench
while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. 10. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area and have
Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has
the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible.
been tightened twice. The correct wheel nut torque is
100 ft lbs (135 N·m). If you doubt that you have 11. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct
the tire pressure as required.
tightened the nuts correctly, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a
service station.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 401
Road Tire Installation
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the mounting
studs which are on each side of the valve stem. Install
the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut
toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
6
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem
2 — Valve Notch
3 — Wheel Lug Nut
4 — Wheel Cover
5 — Mounting Stud
402 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the 6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
a hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightness of
each lug nut is 100 ft/lbs (135 N·m). If in doubt about
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.
lug nuts.
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
WARNING!
seated against the wheel.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle Vehicles Without Wheel Covers
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may 1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
result in personal injury.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
handle counterclockwise.
lug nuts.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 403
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
JUMP-STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
handle counterclockwise.
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the precautions.
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
CAUTION!
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightness of
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
each lug nut is 100 ft/lbs (135 N·m). If in doubt about
other booster source with a system voltage greater
the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.
alternator or electrical system may occur.
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
6
404 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located between the left
front headlight assembly and the left front wheel splash
shield. To allow jump-starting there are remote battery
posts located on the left side of the engine compartment.
Remote Battery Posts
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (covered with protective cap)
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 405
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive (+) battery post. To remove the cover, press the
locking tab and pull upward on the cover.
6
Locking Tab
406 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
WARNING!
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
Failure to follow this procedure could result in
personal injury or property damage due to battery
explosion.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 407
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from
the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
10. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive (+) battery post of the discharged vehicle.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle,
you should have the battery and charging system inthe engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
spected at your authorized dealer.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
CAUTION!
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
6
408 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE, while gently pressing the accelerator.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to
maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
wheels, or racing the engine.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the ⬙ESC
Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 409
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
3. Remove the rubber cupholder liner. Squeeze one side
of the liner’s center to expose its edge and facilitate
removal.
4. Turn the ignition to the ACC or ON/RUN position,
but do not start the engine.
5. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
6. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the access hole
(at the front of the cupholder) and push and hold the
override release lever forward.
7. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be 8. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever: 9. Reinstall the cupholder liner.
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
6
410 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a towing service.
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Wheels OFF the Ground
NONE
Rear
Flatbed
Front
ALL
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
All Models
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 25 mph (40 km/h) max speed
• 15 mi (24 km) max distance
OK
BEST METHOD
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 411
If your vehicle’s battery is discharged, see ⬙Shift Lever The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
Override⬙ in ⬙What To Do In Emergencies⬙ for instruc- all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
tions on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission
for towing.
is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all four
wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Damage to the fascia will occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result.
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
• The towing distance must not exceed 15 mi (24 km).
• The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must
be towed faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than
15 mi (24 km), it must be towed with the front wheels
OFF the ground (using a flatbed truck, towing dolly, or
wheel lift equipment with the front wheels raised).
6
412 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than
15 mi (24 km) with front wheels on the ground can
cause severe transmission damage. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
wheels on the ground) is not allowed, as transmission
damage will occur. If rear towing is the only alternative,
the front wheels must be placed on a towing dolly. Proper
towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Without The Ignition Key
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK/OFF position. Flatbed
towing is the preferred towing method. However, if a
flatbed towing vehicle is not available, wheel lift towing
equipment may be used. Rear towing (with the front
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L . . . . . . . . . .415 䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .420
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .416
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .417
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .417
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
▫ A/C Air Filter – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
7
414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431 䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
▫ Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
▫ Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
▫ Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
▫ Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
▫ License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
▫ Cleaning Center Console Cupholders. . . . . . . .451
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND
GENUINE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
▫ Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L
7
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Engine Coolant Reservoir
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
6 — Air Cleaner Filter
7 — Engine Oil Fill
8 — Coolant Pressure Cap
9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Engine Coolant Reservoir
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
5
6
7
8
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Engine Oil Dipstick
— Engine Oil Fill
— Washer Fluid Reservoir
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL).
It will also store diagnostic codes and other information
to assist your service technician in making repairs. Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or
soon as possible.
improperly installed. A “GASCAP” message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap
until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication that
7
418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the trip odometer
“Reset” button to turn off the message. If the problem
persists, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If
the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will
turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction 3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
of a normal bulb check.
system is ready for testing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
happen:
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should running.
not proceed to the I/M station.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure
the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by
the use of non-MOPAR® parts for maintenance and repairs
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your will not be covered by the manufacturer’s warranty.
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
DEALER SERVICE
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personvehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
7
420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
available which include detailed service information for MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
attempting any procedure yourself.
services determined by the engineers who designed your
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control vehicle.
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
penalties being assessed against you.
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform
repairs and service when necessary could result in
more costly repairs, damage to other components or
negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately
have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified fluid
for the flushing procedure.
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level
before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will
give you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and
only when the engine is hot, will improve the accuracy of
the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the
range markings on the dipstick. Either the range markings consist of a crosshatch zone marked SAFE or a
crosshatch zone marked with MIN at the low end of the
range and MAX at the high end of the range. Adding one
Engine Oil
quart of oil when the reading is at the low end of the
Checking Oil Level
range marking will raise the oil level to the high end of
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must the range marking.
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
7
422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the engine
will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil
pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This
could damage your engine. Also, be sure the oil fill
cap is replaced and tightened after adding oil.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
NOTE:Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity – 3.6L Engine
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
Engine Oil Viscosity – 2.4L Engine
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine ComSAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating partment” illustration in this section.
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
Synthetic Engine Oils
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine
oil viscosity for your engine. For information on the engine
oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
7
424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Materials Added To Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the
addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes)
to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product
and its performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives.
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the filter and are recommended.
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
your area.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
NOTE: The battery is stored in a compartment behind
the left front fender and is accessible without removing
the tire and wheel. Remote battery terminals are located
in the engine compartment for jump-starting. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
To access the battery, turn the steering wheel fully to the
right and remove the inner fender shield.
7
426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
7
428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The A/C Air Filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro- the glove box. Perform the following procedure to recarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental place the filter:
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How- 1. Open the glove box and remove all contents.
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other 2. Push in on the sides of the glove box and lower the
door.
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system 3. Disconnect the glove box door dampener from the slot
on the side of the box. This is done by grasping the
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor
dampener connector (on the outside of the box) and the
oil, and refrigerants.
end of the connector pin (on the inside of the box) with
A/C Air Filter – If Equipped
your thumb and forefinger and pulling outward while
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
lightly lifting upward on the door with your other
maintenance intervals.
hand. Once disconnected, the dampener will retract
underneath the instrument panel if you release it.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
4. Pivot the glove box downward.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429
5. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter 7. Install the A/C Air Filter with the arrow on the filter
cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover.
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to install the filter properly will result in the need to
replace it more often.
8. Reinstall the glove box door dampener and glove box.
7
A/C Air Filter Replacement
6. Remove the A/C Air Filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Body Lubrication
Windshield Wiper Blades
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on
geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perforThe external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
mance
of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
water
lines
or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
present,
clean
the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431
Adding Washer Fluid
WARNING!
The windshield washer and the rear window washer
share the same fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is Commercially available windshield washer solvents
located in the engine compartment. Be sure to check the are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the must be exercised when filling or working around
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator the washer solution.
antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to
Exhaust System
flush out the residual water.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
system.
blades clean. This will help blade performance.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exrating information can be found on most washer fluid
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damcontainers.
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
7
432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damverter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- age:
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
damage.
motion.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
vehicle.
against you.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
7
434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Coolant Checks
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at anytime the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze) solution.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
it should be replaced with the specified engine
coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
(Continued)
7
436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze).
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology).
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34° F (−37° C) are
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
anticipated.
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
to ten years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replace- • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionment. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
period, it is important that you use the same engine
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle.
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Adding Coolant
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main- The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac- accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
WARNING!
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not
recommended and can result in cooling system damage.
Drain, flush, and refill as soon as possible to avoid
damage if coolant types are mixed in an emergency.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified
for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage
may result.
7
438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Six-Cylinder Engines – the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the pressurized coolant bottle should be
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check between the “COLD” and “FULL” range on the bottle
with your local authorities to determine the disposal when the engine is cold.
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani- The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing coolpuddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek ant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant
spills immediately.
bottle need only be checked once a month. When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain
Coolant Level
the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle.
Four-Cylinder Engines – the coolant bottle provides a Do not overfill.
quick visual method for determining that the engine
coolant (antifreeze) level is adequate. With the engine
idling and warm to normal operating temperature, the
level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle
should be between the “ADD” and “FULL” lines, shown
on the bottle.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
for leaks.
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor- • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
50% OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum) and
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporengine which contains aluminum components.
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
Points To Remember
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
condenser clean.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
7
440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Master Cylinder – Brake Fluid Level Check
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if
system components should be inspected periodically. the brake system warning light indicates system failure.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when permaintenance intervals.
forming underhood services.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up to
the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are
replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
WARNING! (Continued)
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
(Continued)
7
442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant should be
used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fluid specifications.
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s recommended transmission
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in Special Additives
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fluid specifications. It is The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
important to maintain the transmission fluid at the any special additives in the transmission.
correct level using the recommended fluid.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check – Four-Speed Transmission
Use the following procedure to check the transmission
fluid level properly:
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
2. Run the engine at normal idle speed for at least
60 seconds, and leave the engine running for the rest
of this procedure.
3. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the brake
pedal.
4. Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear position
(allowing time for the transmission to fully engage in
each position), ending with the shift lever in PARK.
5. Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to prevent dirt
from entering the transmission.
7
444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot or
cold. Hot fluid is approximately 180° F (82° C), which is
the normal operating temperature after the vehicle is
driven at least 15 miles (24 km). Hot fluid cannot be held
comfortably between the fingertips. Cold fluid is at a
temperature of approximately 80° F (27° C).
If the fluid level is low, add fluid through the dipstick
tube to bring it to the proper level. Do not overfill. After
adding any quantity of oil through the dipstick tube, wait
at least two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the
transmission before rechecking the fluid level.
8. Check for leaks. Release the parking brake.
7. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert it until seated. To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission
Then, remove the dipstick and note the fluid level on after checking or replenishing fluid, make sure that the
both sides. The fluid level reading is only valid if there dipstick cap is properly reseated.
is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick.
CAUTION!
Note that the holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid
if the actual level is at or above the hole.
• Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac• If the fluid is hot, the fluid level should be in the
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
crosshatched area marked “HOT” (between the upper
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder, and will require more frequent
two holes in the dipstick).
fluid and filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubri• If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be between
cants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your
the lower two holes in the area marked “COLD.”
Vehicle” for fluid specifications.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Dirt and water in the transmission can cause serious damage. To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing
fluid, make sure that the dipstick cap is re-seated
properly.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Refer to the “Service and Warranty Handbook” for the
proper maintenance intervals.
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the transmission
is disassembled for any reason.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Fluid Level Check – Six-Speed Transmission
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to georequire adjustment under normal operating conditions.
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
transmission filler tube is capped and no dipstick is pro- trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
vided. Your authorized dealer can check your transmission corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
fluid level using a special service dipstick. If you notice which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit your au- road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
thorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underfluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
body protection.
7
446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The following maintenance recommendations will enable Washing
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your veresistance built into your vehicle.
hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
What Causes Corrosion?
clear water.
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumupaint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug
The most common causes are:
and Tar Remover to remove.
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
• Stone and gravel impact.
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
• Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
open.
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
7
448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
Cleaning Headlights
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly lights (if equipped) that are lighter and less susceptible to
stone breakage than glass headlights.
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth.
To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution
followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure –
If Equipped
Interior Care
Instrument Panel Cover
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface, which
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not use prowith a clean, dry towel.
tectants or other products, which may cause undesirable
reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the low
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
glare surface.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a
Cleaning Interior Trim
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR® Total Clean or equiva• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose lent, then MOPAR® Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
Armor All®. Use MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent to
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of clean vinyl upholstery.
protectants on Stain Repel products.
7
450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cleaning Leather Upholstery
MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent. Care should
be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with
any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning
fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners
to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a leather
conditioner is not required to maintain the original
condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial householdtype glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window
equipped with the radio antenna. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Cleaning Center Console Cupholders
Removal
Grab the rubber portion of the cupholder and lift upward.
Cleaning
Soak the rubber cupholder liner in a mixture of medium
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap.
Let soak for approximately one hour. After one hour pull
Seat Belt Maintenance
the liner from the water and dip it back into the water
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical about six times. This will loosen any remaining debris.
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Rinse the liner thoroughly under warm running water.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
Shake the excess water from the liner and dry the outer
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a surfaces with a clean soft cloth.
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove Installation
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft
Align the liner in the cupholder and press down firmly.
cloth.
7
452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES
Integrated Power Module
The Integrated Power Module is located in the engine
compartment near the air cleaner assembly. This center
contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A label that
identifies each component may be printed on the inside
of the cover. Refer to the graphic below for FUSES/TIPM
location.
Integrated Power Module
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453
2
Cartridge
Fuse
40 Amp
Green
—
3
—
4
—
5
—
6
—
Cavity
1
Mini
Fuse
—
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
Description
Cavity
Power Top Module –
If Equipped
Brake Vacuum Pump
7
Cartridge
Fuse
—
8
—
Center High Mounted
Stop Light (CHMSL)/
Brake Switch
Ignition Switch
9
10
40 Amp
Green
—
11
—
15 Amp
Lt Blue
12
—
20 Amp
Yellow
Trailer Tow –
If Equipped
Power Mirror Switch/
Climate Controls
Mini
Fuse
30 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Green
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) Sense 1
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) Sense 2
Battery Feed – Power
Seats – If Equipped
Instrument Panel/
Power Locks/
Interior Lights
Selectable Power
Outlet (Inside
Center Arm Rest)
—
7
454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
13
Cartridge
Fuse
—
14
—
15
16
40 Amp
Green
—
17
—
Cavity
Mini
Fuse
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
—
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
10 Amp
Red
Ignition/Cigar
Lighter
Instrument Panel
18
19
Cartridge
Fuse
40 Amp
Green
—
Radiator Fan Relay
20
—
Sunroof –
If Equipped
Wireless Control
Module (WCM)/
Clock/Steering
Control Module
(SCM)
21
—
22
—
23
—
Description
Cavity
Mini
Fuse
—
20 Amp
Yellow
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
Description
Auto Shutdown
(ASD) Relay
Audio Amplifier –
If Equipped
Radio
Siren – If Equipped
Ignition Run –
Climate Controls/
Hot Cupholder –
If Equipped
Auto Shutdown
(ASD) Relay 3
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 455
24
Cartridge
Fuse
—
25
—
26
—
27
—
Cavity
Mini
Fuse
25 Amp
Natural
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
10 Amp
Red
Description
Sunroof –
If Equipped
Ignition Run —
Heated Mirrors If Equipped
Auto Shutdown
(ASD) Relay 2
Ignition Run –
Occupant
Classification
Module (OCM)/
Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC)
28
Cartridge
Fuse
—
29
—
—
30
—
20 Amp
Yellow
31
—
—
Cavity
Mini
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
Description
Ignition Run —
Occupant
Classification
Module (OCM)/
Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC)
Hot Car
(No Fuse Required)
Ignition Run –
Heated Seats –
If Equipped
Spare
7
456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
32
33
34
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
—
30 Amp
Pink
Mini
Fuse
—
10 Amp
Red
—
Description
Cavity
Auto Shutdown
(ASD) Relay 1
Switch Bank/
Diagnostic Link
Connector/
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM)
Anti-Lock Brakes
(ABS) Module – If
Equipped/Electronic
Stability Control
(ESC) Module –
If Equipped
35
Cartridge
Fuse
40 Amp
Green
Mini
Fuse
—
36
30 Amp
Pink
—
37
—
25 Amp
Natural
Description
Anti-Lock Brakes
(ABS) Module – If
Equipped/Electronic
Stability Control
(ESC) Module –
If Equipped
Passenger Door
Module (PDM)/
Driver Door Module
(DDM)
Power Top Module –
If Equipped
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 457
CAUTION!
• When installing the Integrated Power Module
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the Integrated Power
Module, and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow,
it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you will not be using your vehicle for more than
21 days, you may want to take steps to preserve your
battery.
• Disengage the mini-fuse in the Power Distribution
Center labeled IOD (Ignition Off-Draw).
• Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
7
458 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Exterior Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Front Courtesy/Reading
Lamp
Center Courtesy/Reading
Lamp
Visor Vanity Lamp
Glove Box Lamp
Shift Indicator Lamp
Rear Compartment
(Trunk) Lamp
Bulb Number
578/W5W
578/W5W
A6220
A6220
IKLE14140
579
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized
dealer for replacement.
Bi-Halogen Headlamp
Front Turn Signal Lamp
Front Park Lamp
Front Fog Lamp
Center High Mounted
Stop (CHMSL) Lamp
Rear Tail/Stop/Turn
Signal Lamp
Backup Lamp
License Lamp
Bulb Number
HIR2
3157NAK
LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
H11
LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
921
W5W
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 459
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlamp
1. Raise and prop open the hood. Locate the connector
behind the headlamp.
NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the air cleaner
filter housing and position the totally integrated power
module aside prior to replacing the low beam headlamp
on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
2. Reach into engine compartment and from behind the
lamp assembly and grasp the connector.
7
460 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Rotate bulb and connector one-quarter turn and pull 4. Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace the bulb.
outward from assembly.
5. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface,
clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life.
6. Reinsert the bulb and socket assembly and rotate
clockwise one-quarter turn to secure.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 461
Front Turn Signal
1. Raise and prop open the hood.
1. Rotate the bulb’s electrical connector one-quarter turn
counterclockwise and remove it from the fog lamp
housing.
2. Rotate the bulb’s electrical connector one-quarter turn
2. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
counterclockwise and remove it from the headlamp
the replacement bulb.
housing.
3. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
the replacement bulb.
4. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
headlamp housing and rotate the connector onequarter turn clockwise to lock it in place.
Front Fog Lamp
NOTE: Access to the lamps through the lower fascia
cutout is limited. We recommend you access the lamps by
turning the steering wheel to allow access and remove
the inner fender shield.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
3. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the fog
lamp housing and rotate the connector one-quarter
turn clockwise to lock it in place.
7
462 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Placing a small flat head screwdriver or similar
tool between the lamp outboard ball stud and plastic
1. Open the trunk and gently pull back the trunk liner
grommet from inside the trunk can help to disengage the
behind the tail lamp (requires removal of a push pin
outboard edge of the tail lamp.
holding the trunk trim in place near the tail lamp).
3. Grasp the tail lamp by both the outboard and inboard
2. Remove the two plastic wing nuts from the tail lamp
sides, and pull firmly to disengage the tail lamp from
housing.
the vehicle.
Backup Lamps
NOTE: It is normal to hear a loud sound when the lower
tail lamp area unsnaps from the vehicle mounting
bracket during tail lamp removal.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 463
License Plate Lamp
1. Using a small screwdriver, press inward the locking
tab on the side of the lamp assembly and pull down on
the lamp assembly for removal.
2. Pull bulb from socket, replace, and reinstall the lamp
assembly into place ensuring the locking tab is secure.
4. Twist and remove socket from lamp.
5. Remove bulb from socket and replace.
6. Reinstall the tail lamp, fasteners, and trunk liner.
7
464 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S.
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines — (Except 2.4L PZEV)
16.9 Gallons
2.4L PZEV (Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle)
18.5 Gallons
Engine Oil With Filter
2.4L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
4.5 Quarts
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
6 Quarts
Cooling System*
2.4L Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
7.7 Quarts
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
3.6L Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
11.6 Quarts
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Metric
64 Liters
70 Liters
4.4 Liters
5.6 Liters
7.3 Liters
11 Liters
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 465
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs – 2.4L Engine
except PZEV*
Spark Plugs – 2.4L with PZEV*
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil
filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm]).
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.031 in [0.8 mm]).
7
466 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Component
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm]).
Fuel Selection
87 Octane
* PZEV = Partial Zero Emission Vehicle
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you ONLY use MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission
Fluid. Failure to use ATF+4® fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission.
We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3 and SAE J1703. If DOT 3 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR®
ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
▫ Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470 N
C
E
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
468 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referYour vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change ring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle Inforindicator system. The oil change indicator system will mation Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in “Underremind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information
scheduled maintenance.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change interBased on engine operation conditions, the oil change vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser- whichever comes first.
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will • Check engine oil level
influence when the “Oil Change Required” message is • Check windshield washer fluid level
displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the • Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles
wear or damage
(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
master cylinder, power steering and transmission as
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
needed
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than • Check function of all interior and exterior lights
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 469 M
Required Maintenance Intervals.
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
page for the required maintenance intervals.
•
•
•
•
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By
Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required.
Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped
with dipstick.
•
•
•
•
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By
Oil Change Indicator System:
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
8
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, boot seals and replace if
necessary.
Inspect the brake linings, parking
brake function.
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter.
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
2
32,000
M 470 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I Maintenance Chart
N
T
Mileage or time passed
E
(whichever comes first)
N
A
N
Or Years:
C
E
Or Kilometers:
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Replace cabin/air conditioning
filter.
Replace spark plugs
(2.4L Engine). **
Replace spark plugs
(2.4L PZEV Engine Only). **
Replace spark plugs
(3.6L Engine). **
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
32,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 471 M
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
X
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter if using your
vehicle for any of the following:
police, taxi, fleet, or frequent
trailer towing.
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
M 472 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
Mileage or time passed
N
(whichever comes first)
T
E
N
Or Years:
A
Or
Kilometers:
N
C
E
X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
X
X
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 473 M
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .477
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .477 䡵 MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .481
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .478
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .478
▫ In Mexico contact: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
9
476 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .482
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . .483
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 477
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealer, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
9
478 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the • Authorized dealer name
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- P.O. Box 21–8004
solved with this process.
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. Phone: (800) 247–9753
They want to know if you need assistance.
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern, P.O. Box 1621
you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenPhone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 479
Mexico, D. F.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Service Contract
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
9
480 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract.
It is not responsible for any service contract other than
the manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service
contract, and you require service after the manufacturer’s
New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 481
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom- 9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
operating at its best.
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
MOPAR® PARTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
9
482 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted.
If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order
form.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain- assistance of service and engineering specialists to acing, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles. quaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles.
A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, Included are starting, operating, emergency and mainteand/or components is written in straightforward language nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 483
Call toll free at:
Treadwear
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforrequirements in addition to these grades.
mance.
9
484 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance,
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life,
and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
486 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Airbag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .424
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Antenna, Satellite Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .19
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Assistance Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .277
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
INDEX 487
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .27
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
Belts, Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . .
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . .
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . .
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning Light . . . . . . . . .
Brake/Transmission Interlock .
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . .
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.440
.322
.440
.440
.320
.213
.298
.458
.102
Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant). . . . . . . . . . .21
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
10
488 INDEX
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .418
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . .264
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .437
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
INDEX 489
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419 E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 Electric Rear Window Defrost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .176
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . . .225
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Crankcase Ventilation Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
10
490 INDEX
Emergency, In Case of
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .418
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Exhaust Gas Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
INDEX 491
Fabric Care. . . . . . . . . . . .
Filler Location Fuel . . . . . .
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . .
Air Conditioning . . . . .
Automatic Transmission
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil Disposal . . .
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning . . . . .
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . .
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . .
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel Requirements . . . .
Maintenance . . . . . . . .
Replacement Parts . . . .
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449 Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424 Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390 Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
. . . . . . . . . . .294
. . . . . . . . . . .464
. . . . . . . . . . .102
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.443
.440
.434
.421
.466
.465
.167
.461
.160
.408
.362
.370
.365
.363
.363
10
492 INDEX
Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
Filler Door (Gas Cap)
Gasoline . . . . . . . . .
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . .
Light . . . . . . . . . . .
Materials Added . . .
Methanol . . . . . . . .
Octane Rating . . . . .
Requirements . . . . .
Tank Capacity . . . . .
Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . .
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel System Caution . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.210
.210
.362
.210
.211
.365
.363
.362
.362
.464
.366
.370
.371
.452
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising,
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
INDEX 493
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . .166
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Hood Prop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
10
494 INDEX
Jacking Instructions .
Jack Location . . . . .
Jack Operation . . . .
Jump Starting . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.394
.392
.392
.403
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . .
Keyless Entry System . . . . . .
Keyless Entry System (Sedan)
Key, Programming . . . . . . . .
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . .
Knee Bolster. . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.15
.22
.22
.17
.16
.12
.15
.61
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . .330
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
INDEX 495
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . .221
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . .210
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
10
496 INDEX
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine). . . . . . .221
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
INDEX 497
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Personal Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .337
Power
Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . .192
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
10
498 INDEX
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .437
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Remote Control
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Remote Keyless Entry (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .271
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Remote Trunk Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
INDEX 499
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . .52
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Seat Belts (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Setting the Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
10
500 INDEX
Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) . . . . . . . . . .
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.284
.102
.351
.345
.346
.176
.210
.292
.292
.293
.294
.292
.292
.
.
.
.
.
.319
.175
.175
.271
.271
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .61
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Taillights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .277
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . . .337
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
INDEX 501
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . .
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Information . . . . . . . . .
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . .
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . .
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . .
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.349
.341
.351
.392
.346
.341
.344
.342
.392
.349
.337
.353
.220
.483
.344
.350
.352
.331
.333
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . .
Tread Wear Indicators . . .
Tire Safety Information . . . . .
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24-Hour Towing Assistance
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . .
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational . . . . . . . . . .
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Assistance. . . . . . . . .
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System Tips . . . .
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimum Requirements . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.345
.392
.348
.382
.349
.331
.379
.374
.126
.410
.378
.386
.378
.126
.316
.374
.385
.377
.380
10
502 INDEX
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Transaxle
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .27
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Trip Odometer Reset Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Uconnect® (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Understanding Your Instrument Panel. . . . . . . . . . .208
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .264
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
INDEX 503
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .210
Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle’s
electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals.
Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must be installed
properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed
during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly to the
battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The negative
power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to
the negative battery connection. This connection should not be
fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or the
rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting antennas
with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation
of the compass on vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away
from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully shielded
coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low
Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal
may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s electronic
systems.
Chrysler Group LLC
13C481-126-AD
300
4th Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Download PDF